Test Bank for Therapeutic Exercise Foundations and Techniques, 6th Edition : Kisner

Original price was: $35.00.Current price is: $26.50.

Test Bank for Therapeutic Exercise Foundations and Techniques, 6th Edition : Kisner Digital Instant Download

Category:

This is completed downloadable Test Bank for Therapeutic Exercise Foundations and Techniques, 6th Edition : Kisner

Product Details:

  • ISBN-10 ‏ : ‎ 080362574X
  • ISBN-13 ‏ : ‎ 978-0803625747
  • Author:   Carolyn Kisner PT MS (Author), Lynn Allen Colby PT MS (Author)

Thoroughly revised and updated throughout, Kisner & Colby’s 6th Edition offers the most up-to-date exercise guidelines for individualizing interventions for those with movement disorders. Now with contributions from the leading experts in the field, it encompasses all of the principles of therapeutic exercise and manual therapy, including spinal surgery and spinal manipulation. This renowned manual remains the authoritative source for exercise instruction for the therapist and for patient self-management. Plus, you’ll have access to Kisner and Colby’s Therapeutic Exercise Video Library online at DavisPlus, featuring over 30 NEW full-color video clips―94 in all―demonstrating basic therapeutic exercises and techniques.

 

Table of Content:

  1. CHAPTER 1 Therapeutic Exercise: Foundational Concepts
  2. Therapeutic Exercise: Impact on Physical Function
  3. Definition of Therapeutic Exercise
  4. Components of Physical Function: Definition of Key Terms
  5. Balance.
  6. Cardiopulmonary fitness.
  7. FIGURE 1.1 Interrelated components of physical function.
  8. Coordination.
  9. Flexibility.
  10. Mobility.
  11. Muscle performance.
  12. Neuromuscular control.
  13. Postural control, postural stability, and equilibrium.
  14. Stability.
  15. Types of Therapeutic Exercise Interventions
  16. Exercise Safety
  17. BOX 1.1 Therapeutic Exercise Interventions
  18. Classification of Health Status, Functioning, and Disability—Evolution of Models and Related Terminology
  19. Background and Rationale for Classification Systems
  20. Models of Functioning and Disability—Past and Present
  21. Early Models
  22. Need for a New Framework for Functioning and Disability
  23. TABLE 1.1 Comparison of Terminology of Two Disablement Models
  24. FIGURE 1.2 The ICF Framework.
  25. The ICF—An Overview of the Model
  26. Components of Functioning and Disability Models and Applications in Physical Therapy
  27. Background
  28. TABLE 1.2 An Overview of the International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF)*
  29. BOX 1.2 Definition of Key Terms in the ICF
  30. Health Conditions (Pathological/ Pathophysiological Conditions)
  31. Impairments
  32. Types of Impairment
  33. Impairments of body function and body structure.
  34. Primary and secondary impairments.
  35. BOX 1.3 Common Physical Impairments Managed with Therapeutic Exercise
  36. FIGURE 1.3 (A) Impingement syndrome of the shoulder and associated tendonitis of the rotator cuff (health condition/pathology) leading to (B) limited range of shoulder elevation (impairment of body function) are identified during the examination.
  37. Composite impairments.
  38. Activity Limitations/Functional Limitations
  39. FIGURE 1.4 Limited ability to reach overhead (activity limitation/ functional limitation) as the result of impaired shoulder mobility may lead to loss of independence in self care and difficulty performing household tasks independently (participation restriction/disability).
  40. Types of Activity Limitations/Functional Limitations
  41. BOX 1.4 Common Activity Limitations/ Functional Limitations Related to Physical Tasks
  42. Participation Restrictions and Disability
  43. Prevention of Disability
  44. BOX 1.5 Areas of Functioning Associated with Participation Restrictions and Disability
  45. Categories of prevention.
  46. Risk Factors
  47. BOX 1.6 Risk Factors for Disability
  48. Summary
  49. Patient Management and Clinical Decision-Making: An Interactive Relationship
  50. Clinical Decision-Making
  51. BOX 1.7 Requirements for Skilled Clinical Decision-Making During Patient Management
  52. Evidence-Based Practice
  53. Definition and Description of the Process
  54. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  55. Accessing Evidence
  56. FIGURE 1.5 A comprehensive outcomes-oriented model of patient management.
  57. A Patient Management Model
  58. Examination
  59. History
  60. BOX 1.8 Key Questions to Consider During the Initial Examination
  61. BOX 1.9 Information Generated from the Initial History
  62. Systems Review
  63. TABLE 1.3 Areas of Screening for the Systems Review
  64. Specific Tests and Measures
  65. BOX 1.10 Guidelines for Selection of Specific Tests and Measures
  66. Evaluation
  67. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  68. BOX 1.11 Key Questions to Consider During the Evaluation and Diagnostic Processes
  69. Diagnosis
  70. Diagnostic Process
  71. Diagnostic Category
  72. BOX 1.12 Diagnostic Classifications for the Musculoskeletal System
  73. Prognosis and Plan of Care
  74. BOX 1.13 Factors That Influence a Patient’s Prognosis/Expected Outcomes
  75. Plan of Care
  76. Setting Goals and Outcomes in the Plan of Care
  77. BOX 1.14 Key Questions to Establish and Prioitize Patient-Centered Goals and Outcomes in the Plan of Care
  78. Intervention
  79. Coordination, Communication, and Documentation
  80. Procedural Interventions
  81. FIGURE 1.6 Manual resistance exercise, a procedural intervention, is a form of therapeutic exercise used during the early stage of rehabilitation if muscle strength or endurance is impaired.
  82. FIGURE 1.7 Task-specific strengthening exercises are carried out by lifting and lowering a weighted crate in preparation for functional tasks at home or work.
  83. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  84. Patient-Related Instruction
  85. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  86. Outcomes
  87. Functional Outcomes
  88. BOX 1.15 Areas of Outcomes Assessed by Physical Therapists
  89. Measuring Outcomes
  90. Impact of interventions on patient-related, functional outcomes.
  91. Patient satisfaction.
  92. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  93. BOX 1.16 Examples of Determinants of Patient Satisfaction*
  94. Discharge Planning
  95. Strategies for Effective Exercise and Task-Specific Instruction
  96. Preparation for Exercise Instruction
  97. BOX 1.17 Practical Suggestions for Effective Exercise Instruction
  98. Concepts of Motor Learning: A Foundation for Exercise and Task-Specific Instruction
  99. Types of Motor Tasks
  100. Discrete task.
  101. Serial task.
  102. Continuous task.
  103. FIGURE 1.8 Taxonomy of motor tasks: dimensions of task difficulty.
  104. Conditions and Progression of Motor Tasks
  105. Closed or open environment.
  106. FIGURE 1.9 Activities of daily living in the context of the taxonomy of motor tasks.
  107. Inter-trial variability in the environment: absent or present.
  108. FIGURE 1.10 Learning to maintain standing balance on an unstable surface is an example of a motor skill that is performed in an open (moving) environment.
  109. Body stable or body transport.
  110. Manipulation of objects—absent or present.
  111. Stages of Motor Learning
  112. Cognitive Stage
  113. Associative Stage
  114. Autonomous Stage
  115. Variables That Influence Motor Learning—Considerations for Exercise Instruction and Functional Training
  116. Pre-Practice Considerations
  117. Practice
  118. Part versus whole practice.
  119. Practice order—blocked, random, and random/blocked.
  120. BOX 1.18 Types of Practice for Motor Learning
  121. Physical versus mental practice.
  122. Feedback
  123. Intrinsic feedback.
  124. BOX 1.19 Types of Feedback for Motor Learning
  125. BOX 1.20 Feedback Schedules
  126. Augmented feedback.
  127. Knowledge of performance versus knowledge of results.
  128. The feedback schedule—timing and frequency of augmented feedback.
  129. FIGURE 1.11 (A, B) Use of rehabilitative ultrasound imaging provides augmented (visual) feedback on the screen during exercise instruction to help the patient learn how to activate the transversus abdominis and internal oblique muscles.
  130. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  131. Application of Motor-Learning Principles for Exercise Instruction Summarized
  132. BOX 1.21 Characteristics of the Learner and Instructional Strategies for the Three Stages of Motor Learning37,118
  133. COGNITIVE STAGE
  134. ASSOCIATIVE STAGE
  135. AUTONOMOUS STAGE
  136. Adherence to Exercise
  137. Factors that Influence Adherence to an Exercise Program
  138. Patient-Related Factors
  139. Factors Related to the Health Condition or Impairments
  140. Program-Related Variables
  141. Strategies to Foster Adherence
  142. BOX 1.22 Strategies to Foster Adherence to an Exercise Program
  143. Independent Learning Activities
  144. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  145. REFERENCES
  146. CHAPTER 2 Prevention, Health, and Wellness
  147. Key Terms and Concepts
  148. Health.
  149. Wellness.
  150. Health promotion.
  151. Health-Related Quality of Life (HRQOL).
  152. Fitness and Physical Activity.
  153. Role of Physical Therapy in Healthy People 2020
  154. TABLE 2.1 Examples of Healthy People 202025 Goals
  155. TABLE 2.2 Prevention Activities
  156. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  157. Identifying Risk Factors
  158. Pre-Participation Screening
  159. Risk Assessment
  160. BOX 2.1 Activity Prescreening Questions
  161. Determining Readiness to Change
  162. BOX 2.2 Risk Factors for Coronary Artery Disease and Osteoporosis
  163. Behavioral Change Theories
  164. Social cognitive theory.
  165. Health belief model.
  166. Transtheoretical model.
  167. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  168. Additional Factors Affecting the Ability to Change
  169. Motivation.
  170. Self-efficacy.
  171. Developing and Implementing a Program
  172. BOX 2.3 Steps to Develop and Implement Prevention, Health, Wellness, and Fitness Programs
  173. Case Example: Exercise and Osteoporosis
  174. Step 1: Assessing the Need
  175. Step 2: Set Goals and Objectives
  176. Goal
  177. Objectives
  178. Step 3: Develop the Intervention
  179. TABLE 2.3 Sample: Level 1 Exercise and Educational Class Content for Osteoporosis
  180. Step 4: Implement the Program
  181. Step 5: Evaluate the Program
  182. Additional Considerations for Developing Prevention, Health, and Wellness Programs
  183. TABLE 2.4 Issues Affecting Exercise Adherence
  184. Independent Learning Activities
  185. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  186. REFERENCES
  187. II Applied Science of Exercise and Techniques
  188. CHAPTER 3 Range of Motion
  189. Types of ROM Exercises
  190. Indications, Goals, and Limitations of ROM VIDEO 3.1
  191. Passive ROM
  192. Indications for PROM
  193. Goals for PROM
  194. Other Uses for PROM
  195. Limitations of Passive Motion
  196. Active and Active-Assistive ROM
  197. Indications for AROM
  198. Goals for AROM
  199. Limitations of Active ROM
  200. Precautions and Contraindications to ROM Exercises
  201. BOX 3.1 Summary of Precautions and Contraindications to Range of Motion Exercises
  202. Principles and Procedures for Applying ROM Techniques
  203. Examination, Evaluation, and Treatment Planning
  204. Patient Preparation
  205. Application of Techniques
  206. Application of PROM
  207. Application of AROM
  208. ROM Techniques
  209. CLINICAL TIP
  210. Upper Extremity
  211. Shoulder: Flexion and Extension (Fig. 3.1) VIDEO 3.2
  212. Hand Placement and Procedure
  213. FIGURE 3.1 Hand placement and positions for (A) initiating and (B) completing shoulder flexion.
  214. Shoulder: Extension (Hyperextension) (Fig. 3.2)
  215. FIGURE 3.2 Hyperextension of the shoulder (A) with the patient at the edge of the bed and (B) with the patient side-lying.
  216. Shoulder: Abduction and Adduction (Fig. 3.3)
  217. Hand Placement and Procedure
  218. FIGURE 3.3 Abduction of the shoulder with the elbow flexed.
  219. Shoulder: Internal (Medial) and External (Lateral) Rotation (Fig. 3.4)
  220. Hand Placement and Procedure
  221. FIGURE 3.4 The 90/90 position for initiating (A) internal and (B) external rotation of the shoulder.
  222. Shoulder: Horizontal Abduction (Extension) and Adduction (Flexion) (Fig. 3.5)
  223. FIGURE 3.5 Horizontal (A) abduction and (B) adduction of the shoulder.
  224. Hand Placement and Procedure
  225. Scapula: Elevation/Depression, Protraction/ Retraction, and Upward/Downward Rotation (Fig. 3.6)
  226. FIGURE 3.6 ROM of the scapula with the patient (A) prone and with the patient (B) side-lying.
  227. Hand Placement and Procedure
  228. Elbow: Flexion and Extension (Fig. 3.7) VIDEO 3.3
  229. Hand Placement and Procedure
  230. FIGURE 3.7 Elbow (A) flexion and (B) extension with the forearm supinated.
  231. Elongation of Two-Joint Biceps Brachii Muscle
  232. Hand Placement and Procedure
  233. Elongation of Two-Joint Long Head of the Triceps Brachii Muscle (Fig. 3.8)
  234. Hand Placement and Procedure
  235. FIGURE 3.8 End ROM for the long head of the triceps brachii muscle.
  236. Forearm: Pronation and Supination (Fig. 3.9)
  237. Hand Placement and Procedure
  238. Alternate Hand Placement
  239. FIGURE 3.9 Pronation of the forearm.
  240. Wrist: Flexion (Palmar Flexion) and Extension (Dorsiflexion); Radial (Abduction) and Ulnar (Adduction) Deviation (Fig. 3.10) VIDEO 3.4
  241. Hand Placement and Procedure
  242. FIGURE 3.10 ROM at the wrist. Shown is wrist flexion; note that the fingers are free to move in response to passive tension in the extrinsic tendons.
  243. Hand: Cupping and Flattening the Arch of the Hand at the Carpometacarpal and Intermetacarpal Joints (Fig. 3.11)
  244. Hand Placement and Procedure
  245. Alternate Hand Placement
  246. FIGURE 3.11 ROM to the arch of the hand.
  247. Joints of the Thumb and Fingers: Flexion and Extension and Abduction and Adduction (Fig. 3.12) VIDEO 3.5
  248. FIGURE 3.12 ROM to the metacarpophalangeal joint of the thumb.
  249. Hand Placement and Procedure
  250. Alternate Procedure
  251. Elongation of Extrinsic Muscles of the Wrist and Hand: Flexor and Extensor Digitorum Muscles (Fig. 3.13)
  252. General Technique Hand Placement and Procedure
  253. FIGURE 3.13 End of range for the extrinsic finger (A) flexors and
  254. (B) extensors.
  255. Lower Extremity
  256. Combined Hip and Knee: Flexion and Extension (Fig. 3.14) VIDEO 3.6
  257. Hand Placement and Procedure
  258. FIGURE 3.14 (A) Initiating and
  259. (B) completing combined hip and knee flexion.
  260. Hip: Extension (Hyperextension) (Fig. 3.15)
  261. Hand Placement and Procedure
  262. FIGURE 3.15 Hip extension with the patient side-lying.
  263. Elongation of the Two-Joint Hamstring Muscle Group (Fig. 3.16)
  264. Hand Placement and Procedure
  265. FIGURE 3.16 ROM to the hamstring muscle group.
  266. Elongation of the Two-Joint Rectus Femoris Muscle
  267. Hand Placement and Procedure
  268. Hip: Abduction and Adduction (Fig. 3.17)
  269. Hand Placement and Procedure
  270. FIGURE 3.17 Abduction of the hip, maintaining the hip in extension and neutral to rotation.
  271. Hip: Internal (Medial) and External (Lateral) Rotation
  272. Hand Placement and Procedure with the Hip and Knee Extended
  273. Hand Placement and Procedure for Rotation with the Hip and Knee Flexed (Fig. 3.18)
  274. FIGURE 3.18 Rotation of the hip with the hip positioned in 90° of flexion.
  275. Ankle: Dorsiflexion (Fig. 3.19) VIDEO 3.7
  276. Hand Placement and Procedure)
  277. FIGURE 3.19 Dorsiflexion of the ankle.
  278. Ankle: Plantarflexion
  279. Hand Placement and Procedure
  280. Subtalar (Lower Ankle) Joint: Inversion and Eversion (Fig. 3.20)
  281. Hand Placement and Procedure
  282. FIGURE 3.20 Inversion of the subtalar joint.
  283. Transverse Tarsal Joint
  284. Hand Placement and Procedure
  285. Joints of the Toes: Flexion and Extension and Abduction and Adduction (Metatarsophalangeal and Interphalangeal Joints) (Fig. 3.21)
  286. Hand Placement and Procedure
  287. FIGURE 3.21 Extension of the metatarsophalangeal joint of the large toe.
  288. Cervical Spine VIDEO 3.8
  289. Flexion (Forward Bending) (Fig. 3.22A)
  290. Procedure
  291. FIGURE 3.22 Cervical (A) flexion and
  292. Extension (Backward Bending or Hyperextension)
  293. Procedure
  294. Lateral Flexion (Side Bending) and Rotation (Fig. 3.22B)
  295. Procedure
  296. (B) rotation.
  297. Lumbar Spine VIDEO 3.9
  298. Flexion (Fig. 3.23)
  299. Hand Placement and Procedure
  300. FIGURE 3.23 Lumbar flexion is achieved by bringing the patient’s hips into flexion until the pelvis rotates posteriorly.
  301. Extension
  302. Hand Placement and Procedure
  303. Rotation (Fig. 3.24)
  304. Hand Placement and Procedure
  305. FIGURE 3.24 Rotation of the lumbar spine results when the thorax is stabilized and the pelvis lifts off the table as far as allowed.
  306. CLINICAL TIP
  307. Self-Assisted ROM
  308. Self-Assistance
  309. BOX 3.2 Self-Assisted Range of Motion Techniques
  310. Arm and Forearm
  311. FIGURE 3.25 Patient giving self-assisted ROM to shoulder flexion and extension. Horizontal abduction and adduction can be applied with the same hand placement.
  312. FIGURE 3.26 Arm position of patient for giving self-assisted ROM to internal and external rotation of shoulder.
  313. Wrist and Hand
  314. FIGURE 3.27 Patient applying self-assisted wrist flexion and extension with no pressure against the fingers.
  315. FIGURE 3.28 Patient applying self-assisted finger flexion and extension.
  316. FIGURE 3.29 Patient applying self-assisted thumb extension.
  317. Hip and Knee
  318. FIGURE 3.30 Self-assisted flexion of the hip.
  319. FIGURE 3.31 Self-assisted hip abduction and external rotation.
  320. Ankle and Toes
  321. Wand (T-Bar) Exercises
  322. FIGURE 3.32 Position of patient and hand placement for self-assisted ankle and toe motions; shown is inversion and eversion.
  323. FIGURE 3.33 Patient using a wand for self-assisted shoulder (A) flexion, (B) horizontal abduction/adduction, and (C) rotation.
  324. Wall Climbing
  325. FIGURE 3.34 Wall climbing for shoulder elevation.
  326. Overhead Pulleys
  327. Shoulder ROM (Fig. 3.35)
  328. FIGURE 3.35 Use of overhead pulleys to assist shoulder elevation.
  329. Elbow Flexion
  330. Skate Board/Powder Board
  331. Reciprocal Exercise Unit
  332. FIGURE 3.36 Continuous Motion Devices for (A) the shoulder and (B) the knee.
  333. Continuous Passive Motion
  334. Benefits of CPM
  335. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  336. General Guidelines for CPM
  337. ROM Through Functional Patterns
  338. BOX 3.3 Functional Range of Motion Activities
  339. Independent Learning Activities
  340. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  341. Laboratory Practice
  342. REFERENCES
  343. CHAPTER 4 Stretching for Impaired Mobility
  344. Definition of Terms Associated with Mobility and Stretching
  345. Flexibility
  346. Dynamic and Passive Flexibility
  347. Dynamic flexibility.
  348. Passive flexibility.
  349. Hypomobility
  350. Contracture
  351. TABLE 4.1 Comparison of Terminology of Two Disablement Models
  352. Designation of Contractures by Location
  353. Contracture Versus Contraction
  354. Types of Contracture
  355. Myostatic contracture.
  356. Pseudomyostatic contracture.
  357. Arthrogenic and periarticular contracture.
  358. Fibrotic contracture and irreversible contracture.
  359. Selective Stretching
  360. Overstretching and Hypermobility
  361. Overview of Interventions to Increase Mobility of Soft Tissues
  362. Stretching: Manual or Mechanical/Passive or Assisted
  363. Self-Stretching
  364. Neuromuscular Facilitation and Inhibition Techniques
  365. Muscle Energy Techniques
  366. Joint Mobilization/Manipulation
  367. Soft Tissue Mobilization/Manipulation
  368. Neural Tissue Mobilization (Neuromeningeal Mobilization)
  369. Indications, Contraindications, and Potential Outcomes of Stretching Exercises
  370. Indications and Contraindications for Stretching
  371. BOX 4.1 Indications for Use of Stretching
  372. BOX 4.2 Contraindications to Stretching
  373. Potential Benefits and Outcomes of Stretching
  374. Increased Flexibility and ROM
  375. General Fitness
  376. Other Potential Benefits
  377. Injury prevention and reduced postexercise muscle soreness.
  378. Enhanced performance.
  379. Properties of Soft Tissue: Response to Immobilization and Stretch
  380. Mechanical Properties of Contractile Tissue
  381. FIGURE 4.1 Structure of skeletal muscle.
  382. FIGURE 4.2 Muscular connective tissue. Cross-sectional view of the connective tissue in a muscle shows how the perimysium is continuous with the outer layer of epimysium.
  383. Contractile Elements of Muscle
  384. FIGURE 4.3 A model of myofilament sliding. Elongation and shortening of the sarcomere, the contractile unit of muscle.
  385. Mechanical Response of the Contractile Unit to Stretch and Immobilization
  386. Response to Stretch
  387. Response to Immobilization and Remobilization
  388. Morphological changes.
  389. Immobilization in a shortened position.
  390. Immobilization in a lengthened position.
  391. Neurophysiological Properties of Contractile Tissue
  392. Muscle Spindle
  393. FIGURE 4.4 Muscle spindle. Diagram shows intrafusal and extrafusal muscle fibers. The muscle spindle acts as a stretch receptor.
  394. Golgi Tendon Organ
  395. Neurophysiological Response of Muscle to Stretch
  396. Mechanical Properties of Noncontractile Soft Tissue
  397. Composition of Connective Tissue
  398. Collagen fibers.
  399. FIGURE 4.5 Composition of collagen fibers showing the aggregation of tropocollagen crystals as the building blocks of collagen. Organization of the fibers in connective tissue is related to the function of the tissue. Tissues with parallel fiber orientation, such as tendons, are able to withstand greater tensile loads than tissue, such as skin, in which the fiber orientation appears more random.
  400. Elastin fibers.
  401. Reticulin fibers.
  402. Ground substance.
  403. Mechanical Behavior of Noncontractile Tissue
  404. Interpreting Mechanical Behavior of Connective Tissue: The Stress-Strain Curve
  405. FIGURE 4.6 Stress-strain curve. When stressed, initially the wavy collagen fibers straighten (toe region). With additional stress, recoverable deformation occurs in the elastic range. Once the elastic limit is reached, sequential failure of the collagen fibers and tissue occurs in the plastic range, resulting in release of heat (hysteresis) and new length when the stress is released. The length from the stress point (X) results in a new length when released (X′); the heat released is represented by the area under the curve between these two points (hysteresis loop). (Y to Y′ represents additional length from additional stress with more heat released.) Necking is the region in which there is considerable weakening of the tissue, and less force is needed for deformation. Total failure quickly follows even under small loads.
  406. Types of Stress
  407. Regions of the Stress-Strain Curve
  408. Toe region.
  409. Elastic range/linear phase.
  410. Elastic limit.
  411. Plastic range.
  412. Ultimate strength.
  413. Failure.
  414. Structural stiffness.
  415. CLINICAL TIP
  416. Time and Rate Influences on Tissue Deformation
  417. Creep.
  418. Stress-relaxation.
  419. FIGURE 4.7 Tissue response to prolonged stretch forces as a result of viscoelastic properties. (A) Effects of creep. A constant load, applied over time, results in increased tissue length until equilibrium is reached. (B) Effects of stress-relaxation. A load applied with the tissue kept at a constant length results in decreased internal tension in the tissue until equilibrium is reached.
  420. Cyclic loading and connective tissue fatigue.
  421. Summary of Mechanical Principles for Stretching Connective Tissue
  422. Changes in Collagen Affecting Stress-Strain Response
  423. Effects of Immobilization
  424. Effects of Inactivity (Decrease of Normal Activity)
  425. Effects of Age
  426. Effects of Corticosteroids
  427. Effects of Injury
  428. Other Conditions Affecting Collagen
  429. Determinants and Types of Stretching Exercises
  430. BOX 4.3 Determinants of Stretching Interventions
  431. Alignment and Stabilization
  432. BOX 4.4 Types of Stretching
  433. Alignment
  434. FIGURE 4.8 (A) Correct alignment when stretching the rectus femoris: The lumbar spine, pelvis, and hip are held in a neutral position as the knee is flexed. (B) Incorrect position of the hip in flexion. In addition, avoid anterior pelvic tilt, hyperextension of the lumbar spine, and abduction of the hip.
  435. FIGURE 4.9 (A) Correct alignment when stretching to increase shoulder flexion: Note that the cervical and thoracic spine is erect. (B) Incorrect alignment: Note the forward head and rounded spine.
  436. Stabilization
  437. Intensity of Stretch
  438. FIGURE 4.10 (A) The proximal attachment (femur and pelvis) of the muscle being stretched (the quadriceps) is stabilized as the distal segment is moved to increase knee flexion. (B) During this self-stretch of the quadriceps, the distal segment (tibia) is stabilized through the foot as the patient moves the proximal segment (femur) by lunging forward.
  439. Duration of Stretch
  440. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  441. Static Stretching
  442. BOX 4.5 Intensity, Duration, Frequency, and Mode of Stretch—Evidence-Based Interrelationships and Impact on Stretching Outcomes
  443. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  444. Static Progressive Stretching
  445. Cyclic (Intermittent) Stretching
  446. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  447. Speed of Stretch
  448. Importance of a Slowly Applied Stretch
  449. Ballistic Stretching
  450. High-Velocity Stretching in Conditioning Programs and Advanced-Phase Rehabilitation
  451. Frequency of Stretch
  452. Mode of Stretch
  453. Manual Stretching
  454. Characteristics.
  455. BOX 4.6 Considerations for Selecting Methods of Stretching
  456. CLINICAL TIP
  457. Effectiveness.
  458. Application.
  459. Self-Stretching
  460. Characteristics.
  461. Effectiveness.
  462. Application.
  463. FIGURE 4.11 (A) When manually self-stretching the adductors and internal rotators of the hip, the patient moves the distal segment (femur) while stabilizing the proximal segment (pelvis) with body weight.
  464. (B) When self-stretching the hamstrings, the distal segment (tibia) is stabilized through the foot on the surface of a chair as the patient bends forward and moves the proximal segment. The weight of the upper body is the source of the stretch force.
  465. Mechanical Stretching
  466. Characteristics.
  467. Effectiveness.
  468. Application.
  469. FIGURE 4.12 Low-load mechanical stretch with a cuff weight and self-stabilization of the proximal humerus to stretch the elbow flexors and increase end-range elbow extension.
  470. Duration of Mechanical Stretch
  471. FIGURE 4.13 JAS orthosis is a patient-directed device that applies a static progressive stretch.
  472. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  473. Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation Stretching Techniques
  474. Types of PNF Stretching VIDEO 4.1
  475. CLINICAL TIP
  476. Hold-Relax and Contract-Relax
  477. FIGURE 4.14 Hold-relax (HR) procedure to stretch the pectoralis major muscles bilaterally. (A) The therapist horizontally abducts the shoulders bilaterally to a comfortable position. The patient isometrically contracts the pectoralis major muscles against the therapist’s resistance for about 5 to 10 seconds. (B) The patient relaxes voluntarily, and the therapist passively lengthens the pectoralis major muscles by horizontally abducting the shoulders into the newly gained range. After a 10-second rest with the muscles maintained in a comfortably lengthened position, the entire sequence is repeated several times.
  478. Agonist Contraction
  479. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  480. Hold-Relax with Agonist Contraction
  481. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  482. Integration of Function into Stretching
  483. Importance of Strength and Muscle Endurance
  484. Use of Increased Mobility for Functional Activities
  485. FIGURE 4.15 (A, B) Stretching-induced gains in ROM are used during daily activities.
  486. Procedural Guidelines for Application of Stretching Interventions
  487. Examination and Evaluation of the Patient
  488. BOX 4.7 Special Considerations for Teaching Self-Stretching Exercises
  489. BOX 4.8 Special Considerations for Use of Mechanical Stretching Devices
  490. Preparation for Stretching
  491. Application of Manual Stretching Procedures
  492. CLINICAL TIP
  493. After Stretching
  494. Precautions for Stretching
  495. General Precautions
  496. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  497. Special Precautions for Mass-Market Flexibility Programs
  498. Common Errors and Potential Problems
  499. Nonselective or poorly balanced stretching activities.
  500. Insufficient warm-up.
  501. Ineffective stabilization.
  502. Use of ballistic stretching.
  503. Excessive intensity.
  504. Abnormal biomechanics.
  505. Insufficient information about age-related differences.
  506. Strategies for Risk Reduction
  507. Adjuncts to Stretching Interventions
  508. Complementary Exercise Approaches
  509. Relaxation Training
  510. BOX 4.9 Indicators of Relaxation
  511. Common Elements of Relaxation Training
  512. Examples of Approaches to Relaxation Training
  513. Autogenic training.
  514. Progressive relaxation.
  515. Awareness through movement.
  516. Sequence for Progressive Relaxation Techniques
  517. Pilates
  518. Heat
  519. CLINICAL TIP
  520. Methods of Warm-Up
  521. Effectiveness of Warm-up Methods
  522. Cold
  523. CLINICAL TIP
  524. Massage
  525. Massage for Relaxation
  526. Soft Tissue Mobilization/Manipulation Techniques
  527. Biofeedback
  528. Joint Traction or Oscillation
  529. Manual Stretching Techniques in Anatomical Planes of Motion
  530. Upper Extremity Stretching
  531. The Shoulder: Special Considerations
  532. Shoulder Flexion VIDEO 4.2
  533. Hand Placement and Procedure
  534. FIGURE 4.16 (A) Hand placement and stabilization of the scapula to stretch the teres major and increase shoulder flexion.
  535. (B) Hand placement and stabilization of the pelvis to stretch the latissimus dorsi and increase shoulder flexion.
  536. Shoulder Hyperextension VIDEO 4.3
  537. Patient Position
  538. FIGURE 4.17 Hand placement and stabilization of the scapula to increase extension of the shoulder beyond neutral.
  539. Hand Placement and Procedure
  540. Shoulder Abduction
  541. FIGURE 4.18 Hand placement and stabilization of the scapula for the stretching procedure to increase shoulder abduction.
  542. Hand Placement and Procedure
  543. Shoulder Adduction
  544. Shoulder External Rotation VIDEO 4.4
  545. FIGURE 4.19 Shoulder position (slightly abducted and flexed) and hand placement at the mid to proximal forearm to increase external rotation of the shoulder. A folded towel is placed under the distal humerus to maintain the shoulder in slight flexion. The table stabilizes the scapula.
  546. Hand Placement and Procedure
  547. Shoulder Internal Rotation
  548. FIGURE 4.20 Hand placement and stabilization of the shoulder to increase internal rotation of the shoulder.
  549. Hand Placement and Procedure
  550. Shoulder Horizontal Abduction
  551. FIGURE 4.21 Hand placement and stabilization of the anterior aspect of the shoulder and chest to increase horizontal abduction of the shoulder past neutral (to stretch the pectoralis major).
  552. Patient Position
  553. Hand Placement and Procedure
  554. Scapular Mobility
  555. The Elbow and Forearm: Special Considerations
  556. Elbow Flexion
  557. Hand Placement and Procedure
  558. FIGURE 4.22 Hand placement and stabilization to increase elbow flexion with shoulder flexion (to stretch the long head of the triceps brachii).
  559. Patient Position, Hand Placement, and Procedure
  560. Elbow Extension VIDEO 4.5
  561. FIGURE 4.23 Hand placement and stabilization of the scapula and proximal humerus for stretching procedures to increase elbow extension.
  562. Hand Placement and Procedure
  563. Patient Position, Hand Placement, and Procedure
  564. Forearm Supination or Pronation
  565. Hand Placement and Procedure
  566. The Wrist and Hand: Special Considerations VIDEO 4.6
  567. Patient Position
  568. Wrist Flexion
  569. Hand Placement and Procedure
  570. Wrist Extension
  571. Hand Placement and Procedure
  572. FIGURE 4.24 Hand placement and stabilization of the forearm for stretching procedure to increase extension of the wrist.
  573. Radial Deviation
  574. Hand Placement and Procedure
  575. Ulnar Deviation
  576. Hand Placement and Procedure
  577. The Digits: Special Considerations VIDEO 4.7
  578. CMC Joint of the Thumb
  579. Hand Placement and Procedure
  580. MCP Joints of the Digits
  581. Hand Placement and Procedure
  582. PIP and DIP Joints
  583. Hand Placement and Procedure
  584. Stretching Specific Extrinsic and Intrinsic Muscles of the Fingers
  585. Lower Extremity Stretching
  586. The Hip: Special Considerations VIDEO 4.8
  587. Hip Flexion
  588. Hand Placement and Procedure
  589. Hip Flexion with Knee Extension
  590. Hand Placement and Procedure
  591. FIGURE 4.25 Hand placement and stabilization of the opposite femur to stabilize the pelvis and low back for stretching procedures to increase hip flexion with knee extension (stretch the hamstrings) with the therapist (A) standing by the side of the table or (B) kneeling on the table.
  592. Alternative Therapist Position
  593. Hip Extension VIDEO 4.9
  594. FIGURE 4.26 Hand placement and stabilization of the pelvis to increase extension of the hip (stretch the iliopsoas) with the patient lying supine. Flexing the knee when in this position also elongates the rectus femoris.
  595. Patient Position
  596. Hand Placement and Procedure
  597. Alternate Position
  598. Hand Placement and Procedure
  599. FIGURE 4.27 Hand placement and stabilization to increase hyperextension of the hip with the patient lying prone.
  600. Hip Extension with Knee Flexion
  601. Patient Position
  602. Hand Placement and Procedure
  603. Hip Abduction VIDEO 4.10
  604. FIGURE 4.28 Hand placement and stabilization of the opposite extremity (or pelvis) for the stretching procedure to increase abduction of the hip.
  605. Hand Placement and Procedure
  606. Hip Adduction VIDEO 4.11
  607. FIGURE 4.29 Patient positioned side-lying. Hand placement and procedure to stretch the tensor fasciae latae and IT band.
  608. Patient Position
  609. Hand Placement and Procedure
  610. Hip External Rotation
  611. Patient Position
  612. FIGURE 4.30 (A) Hand placement and stabilization of the pelvis to increase external rotation of the hip.
  613. Hand Placement and Procedure
  614. Alternate Position and Procedure
  615. Hip Internal Rotation
  616. Patient Position and Stabilization
  617. Hand Placement and Procedure
  618. (B) Hand placement and stabilization of the pelvis to increase internal rotation of the hip with the patient prone.
  619. The Knee: Special Considerations VIDEO 4.12
  620. Knee Flexion
  621. Patient Position
  622. FIGURE 4.31 Hand placement and stabilization to increase knee flexion (stretch the rectus femoris and quadriceps) with the patient lying prone.
  623. Hand Placement and Procedure
  624. Alternate Position and Procedure
  625. Knee Extension
  626. FIGURE 4.32 Hand placement and stabilization to increase midrange knee extension with the patient lying prone.
  627. Patient Position
  628. Hand Placement and Procedure
  629. End-Range Knee Extension VIDEO 4.13
  630. FIGURE 4.33 Hand placement and stabilization to increase terminal knee extension.
  631. Patient Position
  632. Hand Placement and Procedure
  633. The Ankle and Foot: Special Considerations VIDEO 4.14
  634. Ankle Dorsiflexion
  635. FIGURE 4.34 Hand placement and procedure to increase dorsiflexion of the ankle with the knee extended (stretching the gastrocnemius).
  636. Hand Placement and Procedure
  637. Ankle Plantarflexion
  638. Hand Placement and Procedure
  639. Ankle Inversion and Eversion
  640. Hand Placement and Procedure
  641. Stretching Specific Muscles of the Ankle and Foot
  642. Hand Placement and Procedure
  643. Toe Flexion and Extension
  644. Neck and Trunk
  645. Self-Stretching Techniques
  646. Independent Learning Activities
  647. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  648. Laboratory Practice
  649. REFERENCES
  650. CHAPTER 5 Peripheral Joint Mobilization/Manipulation
  651. Principles of Joint Mobilization/Manipulation
  652. Definitions of Terms
  653. Mobilization/Manipulation
  654. Thrust manipulation/high-velocity thrust (HVT).
  655. Self-Mobilization (Auto-Mobilization)
  656. Mobilization with Movement
  657. Physiological Movements
  658. Accessory Movements
  659. Component motions.
  660. Joint play.
  661. Manipulation Under Anesthesia
  662. Muscle Energy
  663. Basic Concepts of Joint Motion: Arthrokinematics
  664. Joint Shapes
  665. FIGURE 5.1 (A) With ovoid joints, one surface is convex, and the other is concave. (B) With saddle (sellar) joints, one surface is concave in one direction and convex in the other, with the opposing surface convex and concave, respectively.
  666. Types of Motion
  667. Roll
  668. FIGURE 5.2 Representation of one surface rolling on another. New points on one surface meet new points on the opposing surface.
  669. FIGURE 5.3 Rolling is always in the same direction as bone motion, whether the moving bone is (A) convex or (B) concave.
  670. Slide/Translation
  671. FIGURE 5.4 Representation of one surface sliding on another, whether (A) flat or (B) curved. The same point on one surface comes into contact with new points on the opposing surface.
  672. FIGURE 5.5 Representation of the concave-convex rule. (A) If the surface of the moving bone is convex, sliding is in the direction opposite to that of the angular movement of the bone. (B) If the surface of the moving bone is concave, sliding is in the same direction as the angular movement of the bone.
  673. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  674. Combined Roll-Sliding in a Joint
  675. CLINICAL TIP
  676. Spin
  677. FIGURE 5.6 Representation of spinning. There is rotation of a segment about a stationary mechanical axis.
  678. Passive-Angular Stretching Versus Joint-Glide Stretching
  679. FIGURE 5.7 Examples of joint spin locations in the body. (A) Humerus with flexion/extension. (B) Femur with flexion/extension. (C) Head of the radius with pronation/supination.
  680. Other Accessory Motions that Affect the Joint
  681. Compression
  682. Traction/Distraction VIDEO 5.1
  683. FIGURE 5.8 (A) Traction applied to the shaft of the humerus results in caudal gliding of the joint surface. (B) Distraction of the glenohumeral joint requires separation at right angles to the glenoid fossa.
  684. CLINICAL TIP
  685. Effects of Joint Motion
  686. Indications and Limitations for Use of Joint Mobilization/ Manipulation
  687. Pain, Muscle Guarding, and Spasm
  688. Neurophysiological Effects
  689. Mechanical Effects
  690. Reversible Joint Hypomobility
  691. Positional Faults/Subluxations
  692. Progressive Limitation
  693. Functional Immobility
  694. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  695. Limitations of Joint Mobilization/ Manipulation Techniques
  696. Contraindications and Precautions
  697. Hypermobility
  698. Joint Effusion
  699. Inflammation
  700. Conditions Requiring Special Precautions for Stretching
  701. Procedures for Applying Passive Joint Techniques
  702. Examination and Evaluation
  703. Quality of pain
  704. Capsular Restriction
  705. Subluxation or Dislocation
  706. Documentation
  707. Grades or Dosages of Movement for Non-Thrust and Thrust Techniques
  708. BOX 5.1 Characteristics to Describe Mobilization and Manipulation Techniques22
  709. Non-Thrust Oscillation Techniques (Fig. 5.9)
  710. FIGURE 5.9 Representation of oscillation techniques.
  711. Dosage and Rate of Application
  712. Grade I.
  713. Grade II.
  714. Grade III.
  715. Grade IV.
  716. Indications
  717. Non-Thrust Sustained Joint-Play Techniques (Fig. 5.10)
  718. FIGURE 5.10 Representation of sustained joint-play techniques.
  719. Dosages and Rate of Application
  720. Grade I (loosen).
  721. Grade II (tighten).
  722. Grade III (stretch).
  723. Indications
  724. Comparison of Oscillation and Sustained Techniques
  725. Thrust Manipulation/High Velocity Thrust (HVT)
  726. Application
  727. Indications
  728. Positioning and Stabilization
  729. Direction and Target of Treatment Force
  730. FIGURE 5.11 Treatment plane (T.P.) is at right angles to a line drawn from the axis of rotation to the center of the concave articulating surface and lies in the concave surface. Joint traction (distraction) is applied perpendicular to and glides parallel to the T.P.
  731. FIGURE 5.12 Initiation and progression of treatment.
  732. Initiation and Progression of Treatment (Fig. 5.12)
  733. CLINICAL TIP
  734. Patient Response
  735. Total Program
  736. BOX 5.2 Suggested Sequence of Treatment to Gain and Reinforce Functional Mobility
  737. Mobilization with Movement: Principles of Application
  738. Principles and Application of MWM in Clinical Practice
  739. Comparable sign.
  740. Passive techniques.
  741. Accessory glide with active comparable sign.
  742. No pain.
  743. Repetitions.
  744. Description of techniques.
  745. Patient Response and Progression
  746. Pain as a guide.
  747. Self treatment.
  748. Total program.
  749. Theoretical Framework
  750. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  751. Peripheral Joint Mobilization Techniques
  752. Shoulder Girdle Complex
  753. FIGURE 5.13 Bones and joints of the shoulder girdle complex.
  754. Glenohumeral Joint
  755. Resting position.
  756. Treatment plane.
  757. Stabilization.
  758. Glenohumeral Distraction (Fig. 5.14) VIDEO 5.1
  759. Indications
  760. FIGURE 5.14 Glenohumeral joint: distraction in resting position. Note that the force is perpendicular to the T.P. in the glenoid fossa.
  761. Patient Position
  762. Hand Placement
  763. Mobilizing Force
  764. Glenohumeral Caudal Glide in Resting Position (Fig. 5.15) VIDEO 5.2
  765. Indications
  766. FIGURE 5.15 Glenohumeral joint: caudal glide in the resting position. Note that the distraction force is applied by the hand in the axilla, and the caudal glide force is from the hand superior to the humeral head.
  767. Patient Position
  768. Hand Placement
  769. Mobilizing Force
  770. Glenohumeral Caudal Glide (Long Axis Traction)
  771. Hand Placement
  772. Mobilizing Force
  773. Glenohumeral Caudal Glide Progression (Fig. 5.16)
  774. Indication
  775. FIGURE 5.16 Glenohumeral joint: caudal glide with the shoulder near 90°.
  776. Patient Position
  777. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  778. Mobilizing Force
  779. Glenohumeral Elevation Progression (Fig. 5.17)
  780. Indication
  781. FIGURE 5.17 Glenohumeral joint: elevation progression in the sitting position. This is used when the range is greater than 90°. Note the externally rotated position of the humerus; pressure against the head of the humerus is toward the axilla.
  782. Patient Position
  783. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  784. Mobilizing Force
  785. Glenohumeral Posterior Glide, Resting Position (Fig. 5.18) VIDEO 5.3
  786. Indications
  787. FIGURE 5.18 Glenohumeral joint: posterior glide in the resting position.
  788. Patient Position
  789. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  790. Mobilizing Force
  791. Glenohumeral Posterior Glide Progression (Fig. 5.19)
  792. Indications
  793. Patient Position
  794. Hand Placement
  795. FIGURE 5.19 Glenohumeral joint: posterior glide progression. (A) One hand or (B) a belt is used to exert a grade I distraction force.
  796. Mobilizing Force
  797. Glenohumeral Anterior Glide, Resting Position (Fig. 5.20) VIDEO 5.4
  798. Indications
  799. Patient Position
  800. FIGURE 5.20 Glenohumeral joint: anterior glide in the resting position.
  801. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  802. Mobilizing Force
  803. Glenohumeral External Rotation Progressions (Fig. 5.21) VIDEO 5.5
  804. Indication
  805. Techniques
  806. FIGURE 5.21 Glenohumeral joint: distraction for external rotation progression. Note that the humerus is positioned in the resting position with maximum external rotation prior to the application of distraction stretch force.
  807. Acromioclavicular Joint
  808. Indication.
  809. Stabilization.
  810. Anterior Glide of Clavicle on Acromion (Fig. 5.22)
  811. Patient Position
  812. Hand Placement
  813. Mobilizing Force
  814. Sternoclavicular Joint
  815. Joint surfaces.
  816. FIGURE 5.22 Acromioclavicular joint: anterior glide.
  817. Treatment plane.
  818. Patient position and stabilization.
  819. Sternoclavicular Posterior Glide and Superior Glide (Fig. 5.23)
  820. Indications
  821. Hand Placement
  822. FIGURE 5.23 Sternoclavicular joint: posterior and superior glides. (A) Press down with the thumb for posterior glide. (B) Press upward with the index finger for superior glide.
  823. Mobilizing Force
  824. Sternoclavicular Anterior Glide and Caudal (Inferior) Glide (Fig. 5.24)
  825. Indications
  826. FIGURE 5.24 Sternoclavicular joint: anterior and inferior glides. (A) Pull the clavicle upward for an anterior glide. (B) Press caudalward with the curled fingers for an inferior glide.
  827. Hand Placement
  828. Mobilizing Force
  829. Scapulothoracic Soft-Tissue Mobilization (Fig. 5.25) VIDEO 5.6
  830. Patient position.
  831. FIGURE 5.25 Scapulothoracic articulation: elevation, depression, protraction, retraction, upward and downward rotations, and winging.
  832. Hand placement.
  833. Mobilizing force.
  834. Elbow and Forearm Complex
  835. Humeroulnar Articulation
  836. Resting position.
  837. Treatment plane.
  838. Stabilization.
  839. FIGURE 5.26 Bones and joints of the elbow complex.
  840. FIGURE 5.27 Lateral view of the humeroulnar joint, depicting the T.P.
  841. Humeroulnar Distraction and Progression (Fig. 5.28A) VIDEO 5.7
  842. Indications
  843. Patient Position
  844. FIGURE 5.28 Humeroulnar joint: (A) distraction and
  845. Hand Placement
  846. Mobilizing Force
  847. Humeroulnar Distal Glide (Fig. 5.28B)
  848. Indication
  849. (B) distraction with distal glide (scoop motion).
  850. Patient Position and Hand Placement
  851. Mobilizing Force
  852. Humeroulnar Radial Glide
  853. Indication
  854. Patient Position
  855. Hand Placement
  856. Mobilizing Force
  857. Humeroulnar Ulnar Glide
  858. Indication
  859. Patient Position
  860. Mobilizing Force
  861. Humeroradial Articulation VIDEO 5.8
  862. Resting position.
  863. Treatment plane.
  864. Stabilization.
  865. Humeroradial Distraction (Fig. 5.29)
  866. Indications
  867. FIGURE 5.29 Humeroradial joint: distraction.
  868. Patient Position
  869. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  870. Mobilizing Force
  871. Humeroradial Dorsal/Volar Glides (Fig. 5.30)
  872. Indications
  873. Patient Position
  874. Hand Placement
  875. Mobilizing Force
  876. FIGURE 5.30 Humeroradial joint: dorsal and volar glides. This may also be done sitting, as in Figure 5.32, with the elbow positioned in extension and the humerus stabilized by the proximal hand (rather than the ulna).
  877. Humeroradial Compression (Fig. 5.31)
  878. Indication
  879. Patient Position
  880. FIGURE 5.31 Humeroradial joint: compression mobilization. This is a quick thrust with simultaneous supination and compression of the radius.
  881. Hand Placement
  882. Mobilizing Force
  883. Proximal Radioulnar Joint
  884. Resting position.
  885. Treatment plane.
  886. Stabilization.
  887. Proximal Radioulnar Dorsal/Volar Glides (Fig. 5.32) VIDEO 5.8
  888. Indications
  889. FIGURE 5.32 Proximal radioulnar joint: dorsal and volar glides.
  890. Patient Position
  891. Hand Placement
  892. Mobilizing Force
  893. Distal Radioulnar Joint
  894. Resting position.
  895. Treatment plane.
  896. Stabilization.
  897. Distal Radioulnar Dorsal/Volar Glides (Fig. 5.33)
  898. Indications
  899. FIGURE 5.33 Distal radioulnar joint: dorsal and volar glides.
  900. Patient Position
  901. Hand Placement
  902. Mobilizing Force
  903. Wrist and Hand Complex
  904. FIGURE 5.34 Bones and joints of the wrist and hand.
  905. Radiocarpal Joint
  906. Resting position.
  907. Treatment plane.
  908. Stabilization.
  909. Radiocarpal Distraction (Fig. 5.35)
  910. Indications
  911. FIGURE 5.35 Wrist joint: general distraction.
  912. Patient Position
  913. Hand Placement
  914. Mobilizing Force
  915. Radiocarpal Joint: General Glides and Progression
  916. Indications
  917. Patient Position and Hand Placement
  918. Mobilizing Force
  919. FIGURE 5.36 Wrist joint: general mobilization. (A) Dorsal glide. (B) Volar glide.
  920. FIGURE 5.37 Wrist joint: general mobilization—ulnar glide.
  921. Specific Carpal Mobilizations (Figs. 5.38 and 5.39)
  922. Patient and Therapist Positions
  923. Hand Placement and Indications
  924. To increase extension.
  925. FIGURE 5.38 Specific carpal mobilizations: stabilization of the distal bone and volar glide of the proximal bone. Shown is stabilization of the scaphoid and lunate with the index fingers and a volar glide to the radius with the thumbs to increase wrist flexion: (A) drawing of the side view with arrow depicting placement of thumbs on the radius and ‘x’ depicting placement of stabilizing index fingers; (B) illustrates superior view of overlapping thumbs on the radius.
  926. FIGURE 5.39 Specific carpal mobilizations: stabilization of the proximal bone and volar guide of the distal bone. Shown is stabilization of the lunate with the index fingers and volar glide to the capitate with the thumbs to increase extension: (A) drawing of the side view with arrow depicting placement of thumbs on the capitate and ‘x’ depicting placement of stabilizing index fingers; (B) illustrates superior view of overlapping thumbs on the capitate.
  927. To increase flexion.
  928. Mobilizing Force
  929. Ulnar-Meniscal-Triquetral Articulation
  930. Carpometacarpal and Intermetacarpal Joints of Digits II–V
  931. Carpometacarpal Distraction (Fig. 5.40)
  932. Stabilization and Hand Placement
  933. FIGURE 5.40 Carpometacarpal joint: Distraction.
  934. Mobilizing Force
  935. Carpometacarpal and Intermetacarpal: Volar Glide
  936. Indication
  937. Stabilization and Hand Placement
  938. Mobilizing Force
  939. Carpometacarpal Joint of the Thumb
  940. Resting position.
  941. Stabilization.
  942. Treatment plane.
  943. Carpometacarpal Distraction (Thumb)
  944. Indications
  945. Patient Position
  946. FIGURE 5.41 Carpometacarpal joint of the thumb. (A) Ulnar glide to increase flexion. (B) Radial glide to increase extension. (C) Dorsal glide to increase abduction. (D) Volar glide to increase adduction. Note that the thumb of the therapist is placed in the web space between the index and thumb of the patient’s hand to apply a volar glide.
  947. Hand Placement
  948. Mobilizing Force
  949. Carpometacarpal Glides (Thumb) (Fig. 5.41)
  950. Indications
  951. Patient Position and Hand Placement
  952. Mobilizing Force
  953. Metacarpophalangeal and Interphalangeal Joints of the Fingers
  954. Resting position.
  955. Treatment plane.
  956. Stabilization.
  957. Metacarpophalangeal and Interphalangeal Distraction (Fig. 5.42)
  958. Indications
  959. FIGURE 5.42 Metacarpophalangeal joint: distraction.
  960. Hand Placement
  961. Mobilizing Force
  962. Metacarpophalangeal and Interphalangeal Glides and Progression
  963. Indications
  964. FIGURE 5.43 Metacarpophalangeal joint: volar glide.
  965. Mobilizing Force
  966. Hip Joint
  967. FIGURE 5.44 Bones and joints of the pelvis and hip.
  968. Resting position.
  969. Stabilization.
  970. Treatment plane.
  971. Hip Distraction of the Weight-Bearing Surface, Caudal Glide (Fig. 5.45)
  972. FIGURE 5.45 Hip joint: pistraction of the weight-bearing surface.
  973. Indications
  974. Patient Position
  975. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  976. Mobilizing Force
  977. Alternate Position and Technique for Hip Caudal Glide
  978. Hip Posterior Glide (Fig. 5.46) VIDEO 5.9
  979. Indications
  980. Patient Position
  981. FIGURE 5.46 Hip joint: posterior glide.
  982. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  983. Mobilizing Force
  984. Hip Anterior Glide (Fig. 5.47) VIDEO 5.10
  985. Indications
  986. Patient Position
  987. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  988. FIGURE 5.47 Hip joint: anterior glide. (A) prone and
  989. Mobilizing Force
  990. Alternate Position
  991. (B) side-lying.
  992. Knee Joint Complex
  993. FIGURE 5.48 Bones and joints of the knee and leg.
  994. Tibiofemoral Articulations
  995. Resting position.
  996. Treatment plane.
  997. Stabilization.
  998. Tibiofemoral Distraction: Long-Axis Traction (Fig. 5.49)
  999. Indications
  1000. Patient Position
  1001. FIGURE 5.49 Tibiofemoral joint: distraction. (A) sitting (B) supine (C) prone
  1002. Hand Placement
  1003. Mobilizing Force
  1004. Tibiofemoral Posterior Glide (Fig. 5.50)
  1005. Indications
  1006. FIGURE 5.50 Tibiofemoral joint: posterior glide (drawer).
  1007. Patient Position
  1008. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1009. Mobilizing Force
  1010. Tibiofemoral Posterior Glide: Alternate Positions and Progression (Fig. 5.51)
  1011. Patient Position
  1012. FIGURE 5.51 Tibiofemoral joint: posterior glide, sitting.
  1013. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1014. Mobilizing Force
  1015. Tibiofemoral Anterior Glide (Fig. 5.52) VIDEO 5.11
  1016. Indication
  1017. Patient Positions
  1018. FIGURE 5.52 Tibiofemoral joint: anterior glide.
  1019. Hand Placement
  1020. Mobilizing Force
  1021. Alternate Position and Technique
  1022. Patellofemoral Joint
  1023. Patellofemoral Joint, Distal Glide (Fig. 5.53)
  1024. Patient Position
  1025. Hand Placement
  1026. Mobilizing Force
  1027. FIGURE 5.53 Patellofemoral joint: distal glide.
  1028. Patellofemoral Medial or Lateral Glide (Fig. 5.54)
  1029. Indication
  1030. FIGURE 5.54 Patellofemoral joint: lateral glide.
  1031. Patient Position
  1032. Hand Placement
  1033. Mobilizing Force
  1034. Leg and Ankle Joints
  1035. Tibiofibular Joints
  1036. Proximal Tibiofibular Articulation: Anterior (Ventral) Glide (Fig. 5.55)
  1037. Indications
  1038. FIGURE 5.55 Proximal tibiofibular joint: anterior glide.
  1039. Patient Position
  1040. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1041. Mobilizing Force
  1042. Distal Tibiofibular Articulation: Anterior (Ventral) or Posterior (Dorsal) Glide (Fig. 5.56)
  1043. Indication
  1044. FIGURE 5.56 Distal tibiofibular articulation: posterior glide.
  1045. Patient Position
  1046. Hand Placement
  1047. Mobilizing Force
  1048. Talocrural Joint (Upper Ankle Joint) (Fig. 5.57)
  1049. Resting position.
  1050. FIGURE 5.57 (A) Anterior view of the bones and joints of the lower leg and ankle. (B) Medial view. (C) Lateral view of the bones and joint relationships of the ankle and foot.
  1051. Treatment plane.
  1052. Stabilization.
  1053. Talocrural Distraction (Fig. 5.58) VIDEO 5.12
  1054. Indications
  1055. Patient Position
  1056. FIGURE 5.58 Talocrural joint: distraction.
  1057. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1058. Mobilizing Force
  1059. Talocrural Dorsal (Posterior) Glide (Fig. 5.59)
  1060. Indication
  1061. FIGURE 5.59 Talocrural joint: posterior glide.
  1062. Patient Position
  1063. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1064. Mobilizing Force
  1065. Talocrural Ventral (Anterior) Glide (Fig. 5.60)
  1066. Indication
  1067. Patient Position
  1068. FIGURE 5.60 Talocrural joint: anterior glide.
  1069. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1070. Mobilizing Force
  1071. Alternate Position
  1072. Subtalar Joint (Talocalcaneal), Posterior Compartment
  1073. Resting position.
  1074. Treatment plane.
  1075. Stabilization.
  1076. Subtalar Distraction (Fig. 5.61) VIDEO 5.13
  1077. Indications
  1078. FIGURE 5.61 Subtalar (talocalcaneal) joint: distraction.
  1079. Patient and Therapist Positions and Hand Placement
  1080. Mobilizing Force
  1081. FIGURE 5.62 ubtalar joint: lateral glide. (A) prone. (B) side-lying.
  1082. Subtalar Medial Glide or Lateral Glide (Fig. 5.62)
  1083. Indications
  1084. Patient Position
  1085. Therapist Position and Hand Placement
  1086. Mobilizing Force
  1087. Alternate Position
  1088. Intertarsal and Tarsometatarsal Joints
  1089. Intertarsal and Tarsometatarsal Plantar Glide (Fig. 5.63)
  1090. Indication
  1091. Patient Position
  1092. FIGURE 5.63 Plantar glide of a distal tarsal bone on a stabilized proximal bone. Shown is the cuneiform bone on the navicular.
  1093. Stabilization and Hand Placement
  1094. Mobilizing Force
  1095. Intertarsal and Tarsometatarsal Dorsal Glide (Fig. 5.64)
  1096. Indication
  1097. FIGURE 5.64 Dorsal gliding of a distal tarsal on a proximal tarsal. Shown is the cuboid bone on the calcaneus.
  1098. Patient Position
  1099. Stabilization and Hand Placement
  1100. Mobilizing Force
  1101. Alternate Technique
  1102. Intermetatarsal, Metatarsophalangeal, and Interphalangeal Joints
  1103. Independent Learning Activities
  1104. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  1105. Laboratory Practice
  1106. REFERENCES
  1107. CHAPTER 6 Resistance Exercise for Impaired Muscle Performance
  1108. Muscle Performance and Resistance Exercise: Definitions and Guiding Principles
  1109. Strength, Power, and Endurance
  1110. Strength
  1111. Strength training.
  1112. BOX 6.1 Potential Benefits of Resistance Exercise
  1113. Power
  1114. Power training.
  1115. Endurance
  1116. Endurance training.
  1117. Overload Principle
  1118. Description
  1119. Application of the Overload Principle
  1120. SAID Principle
  1121. Specificity of Training
  1122. Transfer of Training
  1123. Reversibility Principle
  1124. Skeletal Muscle Function and Adaptation to Resistance Exercise
  1125. Factors that Influence Tension Generation in Normal Skeletal Muscle
  1126. TABLE 6.1 Determinants and Correlates that Affect Tension Generation of Skeletal Muscle
  1127. Energy Stores and Blood Supply
  1128. Fatigue
  1129. Muscle (local) fatigue.
  1130. TABLE 6.2 Muscle Fiber Types and Resistance to Fatigue
  1131. Cardiopulmonary (general) fatigue.
  1132. BOX 6.2 Signs and Symptoms of Muscle Fatigue
  1133. Threshold for fatigue.
  1134. Factors that influence fatigue.
  1135. Recovery from Exercise
  1136. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1137. CLINICAL TIP
  1138. Age
  1139. Early Childhood and Preadolescence
  1140. BOX 6.3 Summary of Age-Related Changes in Muscle and Muscle Performance Through the Life Span
  1141. FIGURE 6.1 Resistance training, if initiated during the preadolescent years, should be performed using body weight or light weights and carefully supervised.
  1142. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1143. Adolescence
  1144. Young and Middle Adulthood
  1145. Late Adulthood
  1146. FIGURE 6.2 Conditioning and fitness programs for active young and middle-aged adults include resistance training with a balance of (A) upper extremity and (B) lower extremity strengthening exercises.
  1147. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1148. FIGURE 6.3 Incorporating resistance training into a fitness program has many benefits for older adults.
  1149. Psychological and Cognitive Factors
  1150. Attention
  1151. Motivation and Feedback
  1152. Physiological Adaptations to Resistance Exercise
  1153. TABLE 6.3 Physiological Adaptations to Resistance Exercise
  1154. Neural Adaptations
  1155. Skeletal Muscle Adaptations
  1156. Hypertrophy
  1157. Hyperplasia
  1158. Muscle Fiber Type Adaptation
  1159. Vascular and Metabolic Adaptations
  1160. Adaptations of Connective Tissues
  1161. Tendons, Ligaments, and Connective Tissue in Muscle
  1162. Bone
  1163. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1164. Determinants of Resistance Exercise
  1165. BOX 6.4 Determinants of a Resistance Exercise Program
  1166. Alignment and Stabilization
  1167. Alignment
  1168. Alignment and muscle action.
  1169. Alignment and gravity.
  1170. Stabilization
  1171. Intensity
  1172. Submaximal Versus Maximal Exercise Loads
  1173. TABLE 6.4 Indications for Low-Intensity Versus High-Intensity Exercise
  1174. Initial Exercise Load (Amount of Resistance) and Documentation of Training Effects
  1175. Repetition Maximum
  1176. Use of a repetition maximum.
  1177. CLINICAL TIP
  1178. Alternative Methods of Determining Baseline Strength or an Initial Exercise Load
  1179. Training Zone
  1180. BOX 6.5 Percentage of Body Weight as an Initial Exercise Load for Selected Exercises
  1181. Volume
  1182. Repetitions.
  1183. Sets.
  1184. Training to Improve Strength or Endurance: Impact of Exercise Load and Repetitions
  1185. To Improve Muscle Strength
  1186. To Improve Muscle Endurance
  1187. CLINICAL TIP
  1188. Exercise Order
  1189. Frequency
  1190. Duration
  1191. Rest Interval (Recovery Period)
  1192. Purpose of rest intervals.
  1193. Integration of rest into exercise.
  1194. Mode of Exercise
  1195. Type of Muscle Contraction
  1196. FIGURE 6.4 Types of muscle contractions: their relationships to muscle performance and their tension-generating capacities.
  1197. Position for Exercise: Weight-Bearing or Nonweight-Bearing
  1198. Forms of Resistance
  1199. FIGURE 6.5 Body weight serves as the source of resistance during a push-up.
  1200. Energy Systems
  1201. Range of Movement: Short-Arc or Full-Arc Exercise
  1202. Mode of Exercise and Application to Function
  1203. Velocity of Exercise
  1204. Force-Velocity Relationship
  1205. Concentric Muscle Contraction
  1206. Eccentric Muscle Contraction
  1207. FIGURE 6.6 Force-velocity curve for concentric and eccentric exercise.
  1208. Application to Resistance Training
  1209. Periodization and Variation of Training
  1210. Integration of Function
  1211. Balance of Stability and Active Mobility
  1212. TABLE 6.5 Characteristics of Periodized Training
  1213. Balance of Strength, Power, and Endurance
  1214. Task-Specific Movement Patterns with Resistance Exercise
  1215. Types of Resistance Exercise
  1216. BOX 6.6 Selecting Types of Resistance Exercise: Questions to Consider
  1217. TABLE 6.6 Progression of a Resistance Training Program: Factors for Consideration
  1218. Manual and Mechanical Resistance Exercise
  1219. Manual Resistance Exercise
  1220. Mechanical Resistance Exercise
  1221. Isometric Exercise (Static Exercise)
  1222. Rationale for Use of Isometric Exercise
  1223. Types of Isometric Exercise
  1224. Muscle-setting exercises.
  1225. BOX 6.7 Isometric Exercise: Summary of Rationale and Indications
  1226. Stabilization exercises.
  1227. Multiple-angle isometrics.
  1228. Characteristics and Effects of Isometric Training
  1229. Intensity of muscle contraction.
  1230. CLINICAL TIP
  1231. Duration of muscle activation.
  1232. Repetitive contractions.
  1233. Joint angle and mode specificity.
  1234. Sources of resistance.
  1235. Dynamic Exercise: Concentric and Eccentric
  1236. FIGURE 6.7 (A) Concentric and (B) eccentric strengthening of the elbow flexors occurs as a weight is lifted and lowered.
  1237. Rationale for Use of Concentric and Eccentric Exercise
  1238. Special Considerations for Eccentric Training
  1239. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1240. Characteristics and Effects of Concentric and Eccentric Exercise
  1241. Exercise load and strength gains.
  1242. BOX 6.8 Eccentric Versus Concentric Exercise: Summary of Characteristics
  1243. CLINICAL TIP
  1244. Velocity of exercise.
  1245. CLINICAL TIP
  1246. Energy expenditure.
  1247. Specificity of training.
  1248. Cross-training effect.
  1249. Exercise-induced muscle soreness.
  1250. Dynamic Exercise: Constant and Variable Resistance
  1251. Dynamic Exercise: Constant External Resistance
  1252. FIGURE 6.8 (A) N-K Exercise Unit with torque arm and interchangeable weights provides constant external resistance.
  1253. Variable Resistance Exercise
  1254. (B) Cybex/Eagle Fitness Systems shoulder press provides variable resistance throughout the range of motion.
  1255. Special Considerations for DCER and Variable Resistance Exercise
  1256. Excursion of limb movement.
  1257. Velocity of exercise.
  1258. CLINICAL TIP
  1259. Isokinetic Exercise
  1260. FIGURE 6.9 Biodex isokinetic dynamometer is used for testing and training.
  1261. Characteristics of Isokinetic Training
  1262. Constant velocity.
  1263. Range and selection of training velocities.
  1264. TABLE 6.7 Classification of Velocity of Training in Concentric Isokinetic Exercises*
  1265. Reciprocal versus isolated muscle training.
  1266. Specificity of training.
  1267. Compressive forces on joints.
  1268. Accommodation to fatigue.
  1269. Accommodation to a painful arc.
  1270. Training Effects and Carryover to Function
  1271. Limitations in carryover.
  1272. Special Considerations for Isokinetic Training
  1273. Availability of Equipment
  1274. Appropriate Setup
  1275. Initiation and Progression of Isokinetic Training During Rehabilitation
  1276. Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Exercise
  1277. Background
  1278. BOX 6.9 Progression of Isokinetic Training for Rehabilitation
  1279. Controversy and Inconsistency in Use of Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Terminology
  1280. Alternatives to Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Terminology
  1281. Characteristics of Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Exercises
  1282. Open-Chain Exercises
  1283. TABLE 6.8 Characteristics of Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Exercises
  1284. FIGURE 6.10 Open-chain resisted knee flexion.
  1285. Closed-Chain Exercises
  1286. FIGURE 6.11 Bilateral closed-chain resisted hip and knee flexion/extension.
  1287. Rationale for Use of Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Exercises
  1288. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1289. Isolation of Muscle Groups
  1290. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1291. Control of Movements
  1292. Joint Approximation
  1293. Co-activation and Dynamic Stabilization
  1294. Proprioception, Kinesthesia, Neuromuscular Control, and Balance
  1295. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1296. Carryover to Function and Injury Prevention
  1297. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1298. Implementation and Progression of Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Exercises
  1299. Introduction of Open-Chain Training
  1300. Closed-Chain Exercises and Weight-Bearing Restrictions: Use of Unloading
  1301. TABLE 6.9 Parameters and Progression of Closed-Chain Exercises
  1302. Progression of Closed-Chain Exercises
  1303. General Principles of Resistance Training
  1304. Examination and Evaluation
  1305. Preparation for Resistance Exercises
  1306. BOX 6.10 Is Resistance Training Appropriate? Questions to Consider
  1307. Implementation of Resistance Exercises
  1308. Warm-Up
  1309. Placement of Resistance
  1310. FIGURE 6.12 Resistance (R) is applied to the distal end of the segment being strengthened. Resistance is applied in the direction opposite to that of limb movement to resist a concentric muscle contraction and in the same direction as limb movement to resist an eccentric contraction.
  1311. Direction of Resistance
  1312. Stabilization
  1313. FIGURE 6.13 Stabilization is applied at the proximal attachment of the muscle being strengthened. In this figure, the proximal humerus and scapula are stabilized as elbow flexion is resisted.
  1314. Intensity of Exercise/Amount of Resistance
  1315. Number of Repetitions, Sets, and Rest Intervals
  1316. Verbal or Written Instructions
  1317. Monitoring the Patient
  1318. Cool-Down
  1319. Precautions for Resistance Exercise
  1320. BOX 6.11 General Precautions During Resistance Training
  1321. Valsalva Maneuver
  1322. At-Risk Patients
  1323. CLINICAL TIP
  1324. Prevention During Resistance Exercise
  1325. Substitute Motions
  1326. Overtraining and Overwork
  1327. Overtraining
  1328. Overwork
  1329. Exercise-Induced Muscle Soreness
  1330. Acute Muscle Soreness
  1331. Delayed-Onset Muscle Soreness
  1332. Etiology of DOMS.
  1333. BOX 6.12 Delayed-Onset Muscle Soreness: Clinical Signs and Symptoms
  1334. Prevention and treatment of DOMS.
  1335. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1336. Pathological Fracture
  1337. Prevention of Pathological Fracture
  1338. BOX 6.13 Resistance Training Guidelines and Precautions to Reduce the Risk of Pathological Fracture
  1339. Contraindications to Resistance Exercise
  1340. Pain
  1341. Inflammation
  1342. Severe Cardiopulmonary Disease
  1343. Manual Resistance Exercise
  1344. Definition and Use
  1345. Guidelines and Special Considerations
  1346. BOX 6.14 Manual Resistance Exercise: Advantages and Disadvantages
  1347. Body Mechanics of the Therapist
  1348. Application of Manual Resistance and Stabilization
  1349. CLINICAL TIP
  1350. Verbal Commands
  1351. Number of Repetitions and Sets/Rest Intervals
  1352. Techniques: General Background
  1353. Upper Extremity
  1354. Shoulder Flexion VIDEO 6.1
  1355. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1356. FIGURE 6.14 Resisted shoulder flexion.
  1357. Shoulder Extension
  1358. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1359. Shoulder Hyperextension
  1360. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1361. Shoulder Abduction and Adduction
  1362. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1363. FIGURE 6.15 Resisted shoulder abduction.
  1364. Elevation of the Arm in the Plane of the Scapula (“Scaption”)
  1365. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1366. CLINICAL TIP
  1367. Shoulder Internal and External Rotation
  1368. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1369. Alternate Procedure
  1370. FIGURE 6.16 (A) Resisted external rotation of the shoulder with the shoulder positioned in flexion and abduction (approaching the plane of the scapula).
  1371. (B) Resisted internal rotation of the shoulder with the shoulder in 90° of abduction.
  1372. Shoulder Horizontal Abduction and Adduction
  1373. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1374. Elevation and Depression of the Scapula VIDEO 6.2
  1375. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1376. Alternate Procedures: Scapular Depression
  1377. FIGURE 6.17 Elevation of the shoulders (scapulae), resisted bilaterally.
  1378. Protraction and Retraction of the Scapula
  1379. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1380. Elbow Flexion and Extension VIDEO 6.3
  1381. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1382. FIGURE 6.18 Resisted elbow flexion with proximal stabilization.
  1383. FIGURE 6.19 Resisted elbow extension.
  1384. Forearm Pronation and Supination VIDEO 6.4
  1385. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1386. FIGURE 6.20 Resisted pronation of the forearm.
  1387. Wrist Flexion and Extension VIDEO 6.5
  1388. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1389. FIGURE 6.21 Resisted wrist flexion and stabilization of the forearm.
  1390. Wrist Radial and Ulnar Deviation
  1391. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1392. Motions of the Fingers and Thumb VIDEO 6.6
  1393. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1394. FIGURE 6.22 Resisted flexion of the proximal interphalangeal (PIP) joint of the index finger with stabilization of the metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and distal interphalangeal (DIP) joints.
  1395. FIGURE 6.23 Resisted opposition of the thumb.
  1396. Lower Extremity
  1397. Hip Flexion with Knee Flexion VIDEO 6.7
  1398. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1399. FIGURE 6.24 Resisted flexion of the hip with the knee flexed.
  1400. Hip Extension
  1401. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1402. FIGURE 6.25 Resisted hip and knee extension with the hand placed at the popliteal space to prevent hyperextension of the knee.
  1403. Hip Hyperextension
  1404. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1405. FIGURE 6.26 Resisted end-range hip extension with stabilization of the pelvis.
  1406. Hip Abduction and Adduction
  1407. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1408. FIGURE 6.27 Resisted hip abduction.
  1409. Hip Internal and External Rotation
  1410. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1411. FIGURE 6.28 Resisted external rotation of the hip with the patient lying supine.
  1412. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1413. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1414. FIGURE 6.29 Resisted internal rotation of the hip with the patient lying prone.
  1415. Knee Flexion VIDEO 6.8
  1416. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1417. FIGURE 6.30 Resisted knee flexion with stabilization of the hip.
  1418. Knee Extension
  1419. Alternate Patient Positions
  1420. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1421. FIGURE 6.31 Resisted knee extension with the patient sitting and stabilizing the trunk with the upper extremities and the therapist stabilizing the thigh.
  1422. Ankle Dorsiflexion and Plantarflexion VIDEO 6.9
  1423. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1424. FIGURE 6.32 (A) Resisted dorsiflexion. (B) Resisted plantarflexion of the ankle.
  1425. Ankle Inversion and Eversion
  1426. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1427. Flexion and Extension of the Toes
  1428. Hand Placement and Procedure
  1429. Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation: Principles and Techniques
  1430. Diagonal Patterns
  1431. TABLE 6.10 Component Motions of PNF Patterns: Upper and Lower Extremities
  1432. Basic Procedures with PNF Patterns
  1433. Manual Contacts
  1434. Maximal Resistance
  1435. Position and Movement of the Therapist
  1436. Stretch
  1437. Stretch stimulus.
  1438. Stretch reflex.
  1439. Normal Timing
  1440. Traction
  1441. Approximation
  1442. Verbal Commands
  1443. Visual Cues
  1444. Upper Extremity Diagonal Patterns
  1445. D1Flexion VIDEO 6.10
  1446. Starting Position (Fig. 6.33A)
  1447. FIGURE 6.33 (A) Starting position and
  1448. Hand Placement
  1449. Verbal Commands
  1450. Ending Position (Fig. 6.33B)
  1451. (B) ending position for D1 flexion of the upper extremity.
  1452. D1Extension
  1453. Starting Position (Fig. 6.34A)
  1454. FIGURE 6.34 (A) Starting position and
  1455. Hand Placements
  1456. Verbal Commands
  1457. Ending Position (Fig. 6.34B)
  1458. (B) ending position for D1 extension of the upper extremity.
  1459. D2Flexion VIDEO 6.11
  1460. Starting Position (Fig. 6.35A)
  1461. FIGURE 6.35 (A) Starting position and
  1462. Hand Placement
  1463. Verbal Commands
  1464. Ending Position (Fig. 6.35B)
  1465. (B) ending position for D2 flexion of the upper extremity.
  1466. D2Extension
  1467. Starting Position (Fig. 6.36A)
  1468. Hand Placement
  1469. Verbal Commands
  1470. FIGURE 6.36 (A) Starting position and
  1471. Ending Position (Fig. 6.36B)
  1472. (B) ending position for D2 extension of the upper extremity.
  1473. Lower Extremity Diagonal Patterns
  1474. D1Flexion VIDEO 6.12
  1475. Starting Position (Fig. 6.37A)
  1476. FIGURE 6.37 (A) Starting position and
  1477. Hand Placement
  1478. Verbal Commands
  1479. Ending Position (Fig. 6.37B)
  1480. (B) ending position for D1 flexion of the lower extremity.
  1481. D1Extension
  1482. Starting Position (Fig. 6.38A)
  1483. Hand Placement
  1484. Verbal Commands
  1485. Ending Position (Fig. 6.38B)
  1486. FIGURE 6.38 (A) Starting position and (B) ending position for D1 extension of the lower extremity.
  1487. D2Flexion VIDEO 6.13
  1488. Starting Position (Fig. 6.39A)
  1489. Hand Placement
  1490. Verbal Commands
  1491. FIGURE 6.39 (A) Starting position and
  1492. Ending Position (Fig. 6.39B)
  1493. (B) ending position for D2 flexion of the lower extremity.
  1494. D2Extension
  1495. Starting Position (Fig. 6.40A)
  1496. Hand Placement
  1497. FIGURE 6.40 (A) Starting position and
  1498. Verbal Commands
  1499. Ending Position (Fig. 6.40B)
  1500. (B) ending position for D2 extension of the lower extremity.
  1501. Specific Techniques with PNF
  1502. Rhythmic Initiation
  1503. Repeated Contractions
  1504. Reversal of Antagonists
  1505. Slow reversal.
  1506. Slow reversal hold.
  1507. Alternating Isometrics VIDEO 6.14
  1508. FIGURE 6.41 (A) Use of alternating isometrics to improve static strength of the proximal musculature by alternately placing both hands and applying resistance to the anterior aspect of the body and then to the posterior aspect of the body. (B) Use of alternating isometrics in the upper extremities.
  1509. Rhythmic Stabilization
  1510. FIGURE 6.42 Use of rhythmic stabilization to improve stability of the trunk by simultaneously applying resistance in opposite directions to the anterior and posterior surfaces of the trunk, emphasizing isometric contractions of the trunk rotators.
  1511. Mechanical Resistance Exercise
  1512. Application in Rehabilitation Programs
  1513. BOX 6.15 Mechanical Resistance Exercise: Advantages and Disadvantages
  1514. Application in Fitness and Conditioning Programs
  1515. BOX 6.16 Summary of Guidelines for Resistance Training in Conditioning Programs for Healthy Adults (<50–60 years old)
  1516. Special Considerations for Children and Older Adults
  1517. Children and Resistance Training
  1518. FIGURE 6.43 Youth resistance training on Kids-N-Motion® equipment (Triceps-Dip), specifically designed and sized for a child’s use.
  1519. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1520. Older Adults and Resistance Training
  1521. BOX 6.17 Resistance Training for Children: Guidelines and Special Considerations
  1522. BOX 6.18 Resistance Training for Older Adults (>60–65 Years): Guidelines and Special Considerations
  1523. Selected Resistance Training Regimens
  1524. Progressive Resistance Exercise
  1525. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1526. Delorme and Oxford Regimens
  1527. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1528. TABLE 6.11 Comparison of Two PRE Regimens
  1529. DAPRE Regimen
  1530. Circuit Weight Training
  1531. TABLE 6.12 DAPRE Technique
  1532. TABLE 6.13 Calculation of the Adjusted Working Weight for the DAPRE Regimen
  1533. BOX 6.19 Example of a Resistance Training Circuit
  1534. Isokinetic Regimens
  1535. Velocity Spectrum Rehabilitation
  1536. Selection of training velocities.
  1537. Repetitions, sets, and rest.
  1538. Intensity.
  1539. Eccentric Isokinetic Training: Special Considerations
  1540. BOX 6.20 Key Differences in Eccentric Versus Concentric Isokinetic Training
  1541. Equipment for Resistance Training
  1542. Free Weights and Simple Weight-Pulley Systems
  1543. Types of Free Weights
  1544. BOX 6.21 General Principles for the Selection and Use of Equipment
  1545. FIGURE 6.44 (A & B) Holding a weighted ball while performing combined patterns of movement provides resistance to upper extremity and trunk muscles and augments the resistance of body weight to lower extremity muscle groups during weight-bearing activities.
  1546. Simple Weight-Pulley Systems
  1547. FIGURE 6.45 Multi-Exercise Pulley Unit can be used to strengthen a variety of muscle groups.
  1548. Characteristics of Free Weights and Simple Weight-Pulley Systems
  1549. FIGURE 6.46 When the patient is standing and lifting a weight: (A) Zero torque is produced in the shoulder flexors when the shoulder is at 0° of flexion. (B) Maximum torque is produced when the shoulder is at 90° of flexion. (C) Torque again decreases as the arm moves from 90° to 180° of shoulder flexion.
  1550. FIGURE 6.47 When the patient is supine and lifting a weight: (A) Maximum torque is produced at 0° of shoulder flexion. (B) Zero torque is produced at 90° of shoulder flexion. (C) The shoulder extensors are active and contract eccentrically against resistance from 90° to 180° of shoulder flexion.
  1551. Advantages and Disadvantages of Free Weights and Simple Weight-Pulley Systems
  1552. Variable Resistance Units
  1553. Variable Resistance Weight-Cable Systems
  1554. FIGURE 6.48 Variable resistance by means of a cam mechanism in the weight-pulley system is applied to concentric and eccentric contractions of the hamstrings as the knees flex and extend.
  1555. Hydraulic and Pneumatic Resistance Devices
  1556. Advantages and Disadvantages of Variable Resistance Machines
  1557. Elastic Resistance Devices
  1558. Types of Elastic Resistance
  1559. Properties of Elastic Resistance: Implications for Exercise
  1560. Effect of elongation of elastic material.
  1561. Determination and quantification of resistance.
  1562. Fatigue characteristics.
  1563. Application of Elastic Resistance
  1564. Selecting the appropriate grade of material.
  1565. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1566. Selecting the appropriate length.
  1567. Securing bands or tubing.
  1568. FIGURE 6.49 Use of elastic resistance to strengthen (A) upper or (B) lower extremity or (C) trunk musculature.
  1569. Setting up an exercise.
  1570. Progressing exercises.
  1571. Advantages and Disadvantages of Exercise with Elastic Resistance
  1572. Advantages
  1573. Disadvantages
  1574. Equipment for Dynamic Stabilization Training
  1575. BodyBlade®
  1576. FIGURE 6.50 Dynamic stabilization exercises of the upper extremity and trunk using the BodyBlade®.
  1577. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1578. Swiss Balls (Stability Balls)
  1579. Equipment for Closed-Chain Training
  1580. Body Weight Resistance: Multipurpose Exercise Systems
  1581. FIGURE 6.51 Closed-chain training: (A) in the semi-reclining position and (B) standing position using the Total Gym® system.
  1582. CLINICAL TIP
  1583. Slide Boards
  1584. FIGURE 6.52 Pro Fitter provides closed-chain resistance to lower extremity musculature in preparation for functional activities.
  1585. Balance Equipment
  1586. Mini-Trampolines (Rebounders)
  1587. Reciprocal Exercise Equipment
  1588. Stationary Exercise Cycles
  1589. Portable Resistive Reciprocal Exercise Units
  1590. FIGURE 6.53 Resisted reciprocal exercise using the Chattanooga Exerciser.®
  1591. Stair-Stepping Machines
  1592. FIGURE 6.54 A stepping machine provides resistance during alternating lower extremity-pushing movements that simulate stair-climbing.
  1593. Elliptical Trainers and Cross-Country Ski Machines
  1594. Upper Extremity Ergometers
  1595. FIGURE 6.55 An upper extremity ergometer is used for upper body strength and endurance training and cardiopulmonary fitness.
  1596. Isokinetic Testing and Training Equipment
  1597. Features of Isokinetic Dynamometers
  1598. Advantages and Disadvantages of Isokinetic Equipment
  1599. Advantages
  1600. Disadvantages
  1601. Independent Learning Activities
  1602. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  1603. Laboratory Practice
  1604. REFERENCES
  1605. CHAPTER 7 Principles of Aerobic Exercise
  1606. Key Terms and Concepts
  1607. Physical Activity
  1608. Exercise
  1609. Physical Fitness
  1610. Maximum Oxygen Consumption
  1611. Endurance
  1612. Aerobic Exercise Training (Conditioning)
  1613. Adaptation
  1614. Myocardial Oxygen Consumption
  1615. BOX 7.1 Clinical Relevance—Exertional Angina
  1616. Deconditioning
  1617. BOX 7.2 Deconditioning Effects Associated with Bed Rest3
  1618. Energy Systems, Energy Expenditure, and Efficiency
  1619. Energy Systems
  1620. Phosphagen, or ATP-PC, System
  1621. Anaerobic Glycolytic System
  1622. Aerobic System
  1623. Recruitment of Motor Units
  1624. Functional Implications
  1625. Energy Expenditure
  1626. Quantification of Energy Expenditure
  1627. Classification of Activities
  1628. BOX 7.3 Daily Energy Expenditure
  1629. Efficiency
  1630. BOX 7.4 Efficiency Expressed as a Percentage
  1631. Physiological Response to Aerobic Exercise
  1632. Cardiovascular Response to Exercise
  1633. Exercise Pressor Response
  1634. Cardiac Effects
  1635. BOX 7.5 Factors Affecting the Response to Acute Exercise
  1636. Peripheral Effects
  1637. Net reduction in total peripheral resistance.
  1638. Increased cardiac output.
  1639. Increase in systolic blood pressure.
  1640. Respiratory Response to Exercise
  1641. Responses Providing Additional Oxygen to Muscle
  1642. Increased Blood Flow
  1643. Increased Oxygen Extraction
  1644. Oxygen Consumption
  1645. Testing as a Basis for Exercise Programs
  1646. Fitness Testing of Healthy Subjects
  1647. Stress Testing for Convalescing Individuals and Individuals at Risk
  1648. FIGURE 7.1 Cycle ergometer stress test with electrocardiogram monitoring.
  1649. Principles of Stress Testing
  1650. Purpose of Stress Testing
  1651. Preparation for Stress Testing
  1652. Termination of Stress Testing
  1653. BOX 7.6 Precautions for Stress Testing and Exercise Program
  1654. Multistage Testing
  1655. Determinants of an Exercise Program
  1656. Frequency
  1657. Intensity
  1658. Overload Principle
  1659. BOX 7.7 Case Example of an Exercise Stress Test
  1660. Conclusion
  1661. BOX 7.8 Methods to Determine Maximum Heart Rate and Exercise Heart Rate
  1662. Individuals at Risk
  1663. Variables
  1664. Specificity Principle
  1665. Time (Duration)
  1666. Type (Mode)
  1667. Reversibility Principle
  1668. CLINICAL TIP
  1669. Exercise Program
  1670. Warm-Up Period
  1671. Physiological Responses
  1672. Purposes
  1673. Guidelines
  1674. Aerobic Exercise Period
  1675. Continuous Training
  1676. Interval Training
  1677. Circuit Training
  1678. Circuit-Interval Training
  1679. Cool-Down Period
  1680. Application
  1681. Physiological Changes that Occur with Training
  1682. Cardiovascular Changes
  1683. Changes at Rest
  1684. BOX 7.9 General Guidelines for an Aerobic Training Program
  1685. Changes During Exercise
  1686. Respiratory Changes
  1687. Changes at Rest
  1688. Changes During Exercise
  1689. Metabolic Changes
  1690. Changes at Rest
  1691. Changes During Exercise
  1692. Other System Changes
  1693. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1694. Application of Principles of an Aerobic Conditioning Program for the Patient with Coronary Disease
  1695. Inpatient Phase (Phase I)
  1696. Purpose
  1697. Outpatient Phase (Phase II)
  1698. Purpose
  1699. Guidelines
  1700. Frequency.
  1701. Intensity.
  1702. BOX 7.10 Case Example of a Cardiac Rehabilitation Referral
  1703. Time.
  1704. Type.
  1705. Method.
  1706. Weight training.
  1707. Progression.
  1708. Outpatient Program (Phase III)
  1709. Purpose
  1710. Guidelines
  1711. Recreational activities.
  1712. Activities at 8 METs
  1713. Special Considerations
  1714. Adaptive Changes
  1715. CLINICAL TIP
  1716. Applications of Aerobic Training for the Deconditioned Individual and the Patient with Chronic Illness
  1717. Deconditioning
  1718. Reversal of Deconditioning
  1719. Adaptations for Participation Restrictions (Disabilities), Activity Restrictions (Functional Limitations), and Deconditioning
  1720. Impairments, Goals, and Plan of Care
  1721. Common Impairments
  1722. Goals
  1723. Outcomes
  1724. Guidelines
  1725. Age Differences
  1726. BOX 7.11 Guidelines for Initiating an Aerobic Exercise Program for the Deconditioned Individual and the Patient with Chronic Illness
  1727. BOX 7.12 Guidelines for Progression of an Aerobic Training Program
  1728. Children
  1729. Heart rate.
  1730. Stroke volume.
  1731. Cardiac output.
  1732. Arteriovenous oxygen difference.
  1733. Maximum oxygen uptake.
  1734. Blood pressure.
  1735. Respiration.
  1736. Muscle mass and strength.
  1737. Anaerobic ability.
  1738. Young Adults
  1739. Heart rate.
  1740. Stroke volume.
  1741. Cardiac output for the sedentary young man at rest.
  1742. Arteriovenous oxygen difference.
  1743. Maximum oxygen uptake.
  1744. Blood pressure.
  1745. Respiration.
  1746. Muscle mass and strength.
  1747. Anaerobic ability.
  1748. Older Adults
  1749. Heart rate.
  1750. Stroke volume.
  1751. Cardiac output.
  1752. Arteriovenous difference.
  1753. Maximum oxygen uptake.
  1754. Blood pressure.
  1755. Respiration.
  1756. Muscle mass and strength.
  1757. Independent Learning Activities
  1758. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  1759. REFERENCES
  1760. CHAPTER 8 Exercise for Impaired Balance
  1761. Background and Concepts
  1762. Balance: Key Terms and Definitions
  1763. Center of mass.
  1764. Center of gravity.
  1765. Momentum.
  1766. Base of support.
  1767. Limits of stability.
  1768. FIGURE 8.1 Boundaries of the limits of stability while standing, walking, and sitting.
  1769. Ground reaction force and center of pressure.
  1770. Balance Control
  1771. Sensory Systems and Balance Control
  1772. FIGURE 8.2 Interactions of the musculoskeletal and nervous systems and contextual effects for balance control.
  1773. Visual System
  1774. Somatosensory System
  1775. Vestibular System
  1776. Sensory Organization for Balance Control
  1777. Types of Balance Control
  1778. FIGURE 8.3 Ankle, hip, and stepping strategies used by adults to control body sway.
  1779. Motor Strategies for Balance Control
  1780. BOX 8.1 Factors Influencing Selection of Balance Strategies
  1781. TABLE 8.1 Characteristics of the Three Movement Systems for Balance Control Following Perturbations
  1782. Ankle Strategy (Anteroposterior Plane)
  1783. Weight-Shift Strategy (Lateral Plane)
  1784. Suspension Strategy
  1785. Hip Strategy
  1786. Stepping Strategy
  1787. Combined Strategies
  1788. Balance Control Under Varying Conditions
  1789. Balance During Stance
  1790. Balance with Perturbed Standing
  1791. Balance During Whole-Body Lifting
  1792. COM shift.
  1793. FIGURE 8.4 Balance during forward lifting with knees flexed.
  1794. Anticipated weight and momentum.
  1795. Loss of balance.
  1796. Lifting style.
  1797. Lifting instructions.
  1798. FIGURE 8.5 Postural adjustments for lifting a heavy versus a light load. When subjects approach a load (indicated by the vertical bar at time 0), early in the lift subtle differences in the anticipatory postural adjustments are evident. When a heavy load is expected (dark circles) there is greater flexion of the trunk, hips, and knees compared to when a light load is expected (light circles).
  1799. FIGURE 8.6 Balance during forward lifting with knees extended.
  1800. FIGURE 8.7 Squat lift with trunk erect and object placed between the feet.
  1801. FIGURE 8.8 Straddle lift with trunk erect and object placed between the feet.
  1802. Lifting styles.
  1803. CLINICAL TIP
  1804. FIGURE 8.9 Side lift with the right trunk in lateral flexion and rotation results in high loads on the lumbar spine and should be avoided.
  1805. Balance in Unperturbed Human Gait
  1806. Impaired Balance
  1807. Sensory Input Impairments
  1808. Sensorimotor Integration Impairments
  1809. Biomechanical and Motor Output Impairments
  1810. Deficits with Aging
  1811. BOX 8.2 Most Common Risk Factors for Falls Among the Elderly
  1812. CLINICAL TIP
  1813. TABLE 8.2 Outcome Measures for Fall Risk Assessment
  1814. Deficits from Medications
  1815. Management of Impaired Balance
  1816. Examination and Evaluation of Impaired Balance
  1817. Static Balance Tests
  1818. TABLE 8.3 Balance Assessments and Interventions
  1819. Dynamic Balance Tests
  1820. Anticipatory Postural Control Tests
  1821. Reactive Postural Control Tests
  1822. Sensory Organization Tests
  1823. Functional Tests
  1824. Balance Training
  1825. CLINICAL TIP
  1826. BOX 8.3 Safety During Balance Training
  1827. Static Balance Control
  1828. FIGURE 8.10 Balance during single leg stance.
  1829. FIGURE 8.11 Balance while standing with resistance provided to the arms via elastic resistance.
  1830. FIGURE 8.12 Balance while standing with arm abducting and holding a weight.
  1831. FIGURE 8.13 Balance while standing and catching a ball.
  1832. Dynamic Balance Control
  1833. FIGURE 8.14 Balance while standing on wobble boards.
  1834. FIGURE 8.15 Balance while standing on wobble boards with arm movements.
  1835. FIGURE 8.16 Balance while standing on wobble boards with arms above the head.
  1836. FIGURE 8.17 One-legged stance with resisted shoulder extension using elastic resistance.
  1837. Anticipatory Balance Control
  1838. FIGURE 8.18 Balance when standing while reaching and catching the ball overhead.
  1839. Reactive Balance Control
  1840. Sensory Organization
  1841. Balance During Functional Activities
  1842. FIGURE 8.19 Functional balance during a golf swing.
  1843. Safety During Gait, Locomotion, or Balance
  1844. CLINICAL TIP
  1845. Health and Environmental Factors
  1846. Low Vision
  1847. Sensory Loss
  1848. Medications
  1849. Evidence-Based Balance Exercise Programs for Fall Prevention in the Elderly
  1850. CLINICAL TIP
  1851. Home Exercise Program for Reducing Risk of Falls for People at High Risk
  1852. Otego Home Exercise Program
  1853. FIGURE 8.20 Rising up on toes to strengthen plantarflexors.
  1854. FIGURE 8.21 Rocking back onto the heels while raising the toes to strengthen dorsiflexors.
  1855. FIGURE 8.22 Practicing the sit-to-stand transfer is an important functional activity to strengthen the legs and improve dynamic balance.
  1856. FIGURE 8.23 Tandem walking (A) performed with light touch on a firm surface for support; and (B) performed without external support. Note that the therapist closely guards the patient for safety.
  1857. BOX 8.4 The Otego Home Exercise Program44
  1858. Supervised Group Program Incorporating Strengthening, Walking, and Functional Activities
  1859. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1860. Multisystem Group Exercise Program Incorporating a Circuit of Activities to Address Balance Impairments and Function
  1861. BOX 8.5 Balance Exercise Program Incorporating Strengthening, Walking, and Functional Activities96
  1862. Tai Chi for Balance Training
  1863. TABLE 8.4 Circuit Training Program to Address Balance Impairments and Function112
  1864. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1865. Evidence-Based Balance Exercise Programs for Specific Musculoskeletal Conditions
  1866. FIGURE 8.24 In this Tai Chi form, the participant shifts the bodyweight toward one leg while moving the arms.
  1867. Ankle Sprains
  1868. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1869. FIGURE 8.25 Balance program for reducing the incidence of ankle sprains in athletes using a wobble board: (A) single-leg squat (knee bent 30º to 45º), (B) single-leg stance while rotating the board; and (C) single-leg stance while performing functional activities (i.e., catching a ball).
  1870. Anterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries
  1871. Low Back Pain
  1872. Independent Learning Activities
  1873. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  1874. Laboratory Practice
  1875. Case Studies
  1876. REFERENCES
  1877. CHAPTER 9 Aquatic Exercise
  1878. Background and Principles for Aquatic Exercise
  1879. Definition of Aquatic Exercise
  1880. Goals and Indications for Aquatic Exercise
  1881. Precautions and Contraindications to Aquatic Exercise
  1882. Precautions
  1883. Fear of Water
  1884. Neurological Disorders
  1885. Respiratory Disorders
  1886. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1887. Cardiac Dysfunction
  1888. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  1889. Small, Open Wounds and Lines
  1890. Contraindications
  1891. Properties of Water
  1892. Physical Properties of Water
  1893. Buoyancy (Fig. 9.1)
  1894. Definition.
  1895. FIGURE 9.1 Percentage of weight bearing at various immersion depths.
  1896. Properties.
  1897. Clinical significance.
  1898. CLINICAL TIP
  1899. Hydrostatic Pressure
  1900. Definition.
  1901. Properties.
  1902. Clinical significance.
  1903. CLINICAL TIP
  1904. Viscosity
  1905. Definition.
  1906. Properties.
  1907. Clinical significance.
  1908. CLINICAL TIP
  1909. Surface Tension
  1910. Definition.
  1911. Properties.
  1912. Clinical significance.
  1913. Hydromechanics
  1914. Definition.
  1915. Components of flow motion.
  1916. Clinical significance of drag.
  1917. CLINICAL TIP
  1918. Thermodynamics
  1919. Specific Heat
  1920. Definition.
  1921. Properties.
  1922. Clinical significance.
  1923. Temperature Transfer
  1924. Center of Buoyancy (Fig. 9.2)
  1925. Definition.
  1926. Properties.
  1927. Clinical significance.
  1928. FIGURE 9.2 Center of buoyancy.
  1929. Aquatic Temperature and Therapeutic Exercise
  1930. Temperature Regulation
  1931. Mobility and Functional Control Exercise
  1932. Aerobic Conditioning
  1933. CLINICAL TIP
  1934. Pools for Aquatic Exercise
  1935. Traditional Therapeutic Pools (Fig. 9.3)
  1936. FIGURE 9.3 Traditional therapeutic pool.
  1937. Individual Patient Pools (Fig. 9.4)
  1938. FIGURE 9.4 Hydro Track©, self-contained underwater treadmill system.
  1939. Special Equipment for Aquatic Exercise
  1940. Collars, Rings, Belts, and Vests
  1941. FIGURE 9.5 Cervical collar.
  1942. FIGURE 9.6 Flotation rings.
  1943. FIGURE 9.7 Buoyancy belts.
  1944. Swim Bars
  1945. FIGURE 9.8 Swim bars.
  1946. Gloves, Hand Paddles, and Hydro-tone® Balls
  1947. FIGURE 9.9 Hand paddles.
  1948. Fins and Hydro-tone® Boots
  1949. Kickboards
  1950. FIGURE 9.10 Hydro-tone® boots and bells.
  1951. FIGURE 9.11 Kickboards.
  1952. Pool Care and Safety
  1953. CLINICAL TIP
  1954. Exercise Interventions Using an Aquatic Environment
  1955. Stretching Exercises
  1956. Manual Stretching Techniques
  1957. Spine Stretching Techniques
  1958. Cervical Spine: Flexion
  1959. Practitioner Position
  1960. Patient Position
  1961. Hand Placement
  1962. Direction of Movement
  1963. Cervical Spine: Lateral Flexion (Fig. 9.12)
  1964. Practitioner Position
  1965. Patient Position
  1966. Hand Placement
  1967. Direction of Movement
  1968. FIGURE 9.12 Hand placement and stabilization for stretching to increase cervical lateral flexion.
  1969. Thoracic and Lumbar Spine: Lateral Flexion/Side Bending (Fig. 9.13)
  1970. Practitioner Position
  1971. FIGURE 9.13 Hand placement and stabilization for stretching to increase lateral trunk flexion.
  1972. Patient Position
  1973. Hand Placement
  1974. Direction of Movement
  1975. Shoulder Stretching Techniques
  1976. Shoulder Flexion (Fig. 9.14)
  1977. Practitioner Position
  1978. Patient Position
  1979. FIGURE 9.14 Hand placement and stabilization for stretching to increase shoulder flexion.
  1980. Hand Placement
  1981. Direction of Movement
  1982. Shoulder Abduction
  1983. Practitioner Position
  1984. Patient Position
  1985. Hand Placement
  1986. Direction of Movement
  1987. Shoulder External Rotation
  1988. Practitioner Position
  1989. Patient Position
  1990. Hand Placement
  1991. Direction of Movement
  1992. Shoulder Internal Rotation
  1993. Practitioner Position
  1994. Patient Position
  1995. Hand Placement
  1996. Direction of Movement
  1997. Hip Stretching Techniques
  1998. Hip Extension
  1999. Practitioner Position
  2000. Patient Position
  2001. Hand Placement
  2002. Direction of Movement
  2003. Hip External Rotation
  2004. Practitioner Position
  2005. Patient Position
  2006. Hand Placement
  2007. Direction of Movement
  2008. Hip Internal Rotation
  2009. Practitioner Position
  2010. Patient Position
  2011. Hand Placement
  2012. Direction of Movement
  2013. Knee Stretching Techniques
  2014. Knee Extension with Patient on Steps
  2015. Practitioner Position
  2016. Patient Position
  2017. Hand Placement
  2018. Direction of Movement
  2019. Knee Flexion with Patient on Steps
  2020. Practitioner Position
  2021. Patient Position
  2022. Hand Placement
  2023. Direction of Movement
  2024. Knee Flexion with Patient Supine (Fig. 9.15)
  2025. Practitioner Position
  2026. Patient Position
  2027. FIGURE 9.15 Hand placement and stabilization for stretching to increase knee flexion.
  2028. Hand Placement
  2029. Direction of Movement
  2030. Hamstrings Stretch
  2031. Practitioner Position
  2032. Patient Position
  2033. Hand Placement
  2034. Direction of Movement
  2035. Self-Stretching with Aquatic Equipment
  2036. Shoulder Flexion and Abduction
  2037. Patient Position
  2038. Equipment
  2039. Direction of Movement
  2040. Hip Flexion (Fig. 9.16)
  2041. Patient Position
  2042. Equipment
  2043. FIGURE 9.16 Self-stretching technique to increase hip flexion (stretch the hamstrings) using aquatic equipment.
  2044. Direction of Movement
  2045. Knee Extension
  2046. Patient Position
  2047. Equipment
  2048. Direction of Movement
  2049. Knee Flexion
  2050. Patient Position
  2051. Equipment
  2052. Direction of Movement
  2053. Strengthening Exercises
  2054. Manual Resistance Exercises
  2055. Upper Extremity Manual Resistance Techniques
  2056. Shoulder Flexion/Extension (Fig. 9.17A & B)
  2057. Practitioner Position
  2058. Patient Position
  2059. Hand Placement
  2060. Direction of Movement
  2061. FIGURE 9.17 Manual resistance exercise for strengthening shoulder flexion. (A) start position and (B) end position.
  2062. Shoulder Abduction
  2063. Practitioner Position
  2064. Patient Position
  2065. Hand Placement
  2066. Direction of Movement
  2067. Shoulder Internal/External Rotation (Fig. 9.18A & B)
  2068. Practitioner Position
  2069. FIGURE 9.18 Manual resistance exercise for strengthening shoulder external rotation. (A) start position and (B) end position.
  2070. Patient Position
  2071. Hand Placement
  2072. Direction of Movement
  2073. Unilateral Diagonal Pattern: D1Flexion/ Extension of the Upper Extremity
  2074. Practitioner Position
  2075. Patient Position
  2076. Hand Placement
  2077. Direction of Movement
  2078. Unilateral Diagonal Pattern: D2Flexion/ Extension of the Upper Extremity (Fig. 9.19A & B)
  2079. Practitioner Position
  2080. Patient Position
  2081. FIGURE 9.19 Manual resistance exercise for upper extremity unilateral diagonal D2 flexion pattern. (A) start position and (B) end position.
  2082. Hand Placement
  2083. Direction of Movement
  2084. Bilateral Diagonal Pattern: D2Flexion/ Extension of the Upper Extremities (Fig. 9.20A & B)
  2085. Practitioner Position
  2086. FIGURE 9.20 Manual resistance exercise for upper extremity bilateral diagonal D2 pattern. (A) start position and (B) end position.
  2087. Patient Position
  2088. Hand Placement
  2089. Direction of Motion
  2090. Lower Extremity Manual Resistance Techniques
  2091. Hip Adduction
  2092. Practitioner Position
  2093. Patient Position
  2094. Hand Placement
  2095. Direction of Movement
  2096. Hip Abduction (Fig. 9.21)
  2097. Practitioner Position
  2098. FIGURE 9.21 Manual resistance exercise for strengthening hip abduction with resistance applied to lateral aspect of the leg.
  2099. Patient Position
  2100. Hand Placement
  2101. Direction of Movement
  2102. Hip Flexion with Knee Flexion (Fig. 9.22)
  2103. Practitioner Position
  2104. Patient Position
  2105. FIGURE 9.22 Manual resistance exercise for strengthening hip and knee flexion.
  2106. Hand Placement
  2107. Direction of Movement
  2108. Hip Internal/External Rotation
  2109. Practitioner Position
  2110. Patient Position
  2111. Hand Placement
  2112. Direction of Movement
  2113. Knee Extension
  2114. Practitioner Position
  2115. Patient Position
  2116. Hand Placement
  2117. Direction of Movement
  2118. Ankle Motions
  2119. Practitioner Position
  2120. Patient Position
  2121. Hand Placement
  2122. Ankle Dorsiflexion and Plantarflexion
  2123. Hand Placement
  2124. Direction of Movement
  2125. Ankle Inversion and Eversion
  2126. Hand Placement
  2127. Direction of Movement
  2128. Dynamic Trunk Stabilization
  2129. Dynamic Trunk Stabilization: Frontal Plane (Fig. 9.23)
  2130. Practitioner Position
  2131. FIGURE 9.23 Isometric trunk stabilization exercise using side-to-side motions of the trunk.
  2132. Patient Position
  2133. Execution
  2134. Intensity
  2135. Dynamic Trunk Stabilization: Multidirectional
  2136. Practitioner Position
  2137. Patient Position
  2138. Execution
  2139. Intensity
  2140. Independent Strengthening Exercises
  2141. Extremity Strengthening Exercises (Fig. 9.24A, B, C, D, and E)
  2142. FIGURE 9.24 Mechanical resistance for strengthening (A) shoulder internal and external rotation, (B) elbow flexion and extension, (C) hip flexion and extension, (D) functional squatting, and (E) ankle plantarflexion.
  2143. Lumbar Spine Strengthening
  2144. Trunk-Strengthening Exercises: Standing
  2145. TABLE 9.1 Summary of Motions Used for Upper and Lower Strengthening Exercises
  2146. Trunk-Strengthening Exercises: Semi-Reclined
  2147. Trunk-Strengthening Exercises: Supine
  2148. Trunk-Strengthening Exercises: Prone
  2149. Trunk-Strengthening Exercises in Deep Water
  2150. TABLE 9.2 Summary of Lumbar Spine-Strengthening Exercises
  2151. Aerobic Conditioning
  2152. Treatment Interventions
  2153. Deep-water walking/running (Fig. 9.25).
  2154. FIGURE 9.25 Deep water walking/jogging.
  2155. Mid-water jogging/running (immersed treadmill running).
  2156. Immersed equipment.
  2157. Swimming strokes.
  2158. Physiological Response to Deep-Water Walking/Running
  2159. Cardiovascular response.
  2160. Training effect.
  2161. Proper Form for Deep-Water Running
  2162. Instruction for beginners.
  2163. Accommodating specific patient populations.
  2164. Exercise Monitoring
  2165. Monitoring intensity of exercise.
  2166. Monitoring beginners.
  2167. Equipment Selection
  2168. Deep water equipment.
  2169. Midwater equipment.
  2170. Independent Learning Activities
  2171. Case Studies
  2172. Postoperative Arthroscopic Knee Meniscectomy
  2173. Calf Tear
  2174. Chronic Low Back Pain
  2175. REFERENCES
  2176. III Principles of Intervention
  2177. CHAPTER 10 Soft Tissue Injury, Repair, and Management
  2178. Soft Tissue Lesions
  2179. Examples of Soft Tissue Lesions: Musculoskeletal Disorders
  2180. Clinical Conditions Resulting from Trauma or Pathology
  2181. FIGURE 10.1 Self-perpetuating cycle of muscle spasm.
  2182. Severity of Tissue Injury
  2183. Irritability of Tissue: Stages of Inflammation and Repair
  2184. Acute Stage (Inflammatory Reaction)
  2185. FIGURE 10.2 Pain experienced with ROM when involved tissue is in the (A) acute stage, (B) early subacute stage, and (C) late subacute or chronic stage.
  2186. TABLE 10.1 Stages of Tissue Healing: Characteristics, Clinical Signs, and Interventions
  2187. Subacute Stage (Proliferation, Repair, and Healing)
  2188. Chronic Stage (Maturation and Remodeling)
  2189. Chronic Inflammation
  2190. Chronic Pain Syndrome
  2191. Management During the Acute Stage
  2192. Tissue Response: Inflammation
  2193. Management Guidelines: Protection Phase
  2194. Patient Education
  2195. Protection of the Injured Tissue
  2196. Prevention of Adverse Effects of Immobility
  2197. Tissue-specific movement.
  2198. Intensity of movement.
  2199. BOX 10.1 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Acute Stage/Protection Phase
  2200. General movement.
  2201. Specific Interventions and Dosages
  2202. Passive range of motion.
  2203. Low-dosage joint mobilization/manipulation techniques.
  2204. Muscle setting.
  2205. Massage.
  2206. Interventions for Associated Areas
  2207. Range of motion.
  2208. Resistance exercise.
  2209. Functional activities.
  2210. CLINICAL TIP
  2211. Management During the Subacute Stage
  2212. Tissue Response: Proliferation, Repair, and Healing
  2213. Management Guidelines: Controlled Motion Phase
  2214. Patient Education
  2215. Management of Pain and Inflammation
  2216. BOX 10.2 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Subacute Stage/Controlled Motion Phase
  2217. CLINICAL TIP
  2218. Initiation of Active Exercises
  2219. Multiple-angle, submaximal isometric exercises.
  2220. Active range of motion exercises.
  2221. BOX 10.3 Signs of Excessive Stress with Exercise or Activities
  2222. Muscular endurance exercises.
  2223. Protected weight-bearing exercises.
  2224. Initiation and Progression of Stretching
  2225. Warm the tissues.
  2226. Muscle relaxation techniques.
  2227. Joint mobilization/manipulation.
  2228. Stretching techniques.
  2229. Massage.
  2230. Use of the new range.
  2231. Correction of Contributing Factors
  2232. Management During the Chronic Stage
  2233. Tissue Response: Maturation and Remodeling
  2234. Maturation of Tissue
  2235. Remodeling of Tissue
  2236. Management Guidelines: Return to Function Phase
  2237. BOX 10.4 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Chronic Stage/Return to Function Phase
  2238. Patient Education
  2239. Considerations for Progression of Exercises
  2240. Progression of Stretching
  2241. Progression of Exercises for Muscle Performance: Developing Neuromuscular Control, Strength, and Endurance
  2242. Return to High-Demand Activities
  2243. Cumulative Trauma: Chronic Recurring Pain
  2244. Tissue Response: Chronic Inflammation
  2245. Causes of Chronic Inflammation
  2246. Overuse, cumulative trauma, repetitive strain.
  2247. Trauma.
  2248. Reinjury of an “old scar.”
  2249. Contractures or poor mobility.
  2250. Contributing Factors
  2251. Management Guidelines: Chronic Inflammation
  2252. Chronic Inflammation: Acute Stage
  2253. BOX 10.5 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Chronic Inflammation/Cumulative Trauma Syndromes
  2254. CLINICAL TIP
  2255. Subacute and Chronic Stages of Healing Following Chronic Inflammation
  2256. Independent Learning Activities
  2257. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  2258. REFERENCES
  2259. CHAPTER 11 Joint, Connective Tissue, and Bone Disorders and Management
  2260. Arthritis: Arthrosis
  2261. Clinical Signs and Symptoms
  2262. Impaired Mobility
  2263. Impaired Muscle Performance
  2264. Impaired Balance
  2265. TABLE 11.1 Comparison of Osteoarthritis and Rheumatoid Arthritis5,18,44,84,91,92
  2266. Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions
  2267. Rheumatoid Arthritis
  2268. Characteristics of RA
  2269. BOX 11.1 Criteria for Diagnosis of Rheumatoid Arthritis6
  2270. FIGURE 11.1 (A) Radiographic hallmarks and typical joint deformities with rheumatoid arthritis in small joints of the wrist and hand. (B) Radiographic hallmarks of rheumatoid arthritis in large joints.
  2271. FIGURE 11.2 Advanced rheumatoid arthritis of the hip joints. Note that the destruction caused by rheumatoid arthritis involves the entire joint space and the boney regions on either side of the joint space.
  2272. FIGURE 11.3 Rheumatoid arthritis of the foot. First metatarsophalangeal joint shows severe erosion of the joint surface with subluxation of the metatarsal (arrow).
  2273. Signs and Symptoms: Periods of Active Disease
  2274. Principles of Management: Active Inflammatory Period of RA
  2275. BOX 11.2 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Rheumatoid Arthritis/Active Disease Period
  2276. BOX 11.3 Principles of Joint Protection and Energy Conservation53,73
  2277. CLINICAL TIP
  2278. Principles of Management: Subacute and Chronic Stages of RA
  2279. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2280. Osteoarthritis: Degenerative Joint Disease
  2281. FIGURE 11.4 Radiographic hallmarks of osteoarthritis.
  2282. Characteristics of OA
  2283. FIGURE 11.5 Osteoarthritis of the knees in a 66-year-old woman. This film was taken under weight-bearing conditions. At the patient’s right knee, osteoarthritis is evidenced by narrowed joint space (white arrows), osteophyte formation at the joint margins (large white arrowhead), and sclerotic subchondral bone (small black arrowheads) of both the medial and lateral tibial plateaus. At the patient’s left knee, it is interesting to note that in the area of minimal weight-bearing stress the subchondral bone has lost density, and rarefaction is present on the medial aspect of the joint.
  2284. FIGURE 11.6 Severe osteoarthritis of the hip with pseudocysts. The radiolucent cyst-like areas (arrows) are caused by intrusion of synovial fluid into areas of subchondral bone that have become weakened by microfractures.
  2285. Principles of Management: Osteoarthritis
  2286. BOX 11.4 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Osteoarthritis
  2287. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2288. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2289. Fibromyalgia and Myofascial Pain Syndrome
  2290. TABLE 11.2 Similarities and Differences Between Fibromyalgia and Myofascial Pain Syndrome
  2291. Fibromyalgia
  2292. FIGURE 11.7 Fibromyalgia tender points.
  2293. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2294. Prevalence of FM
  2295. Characteristics of FM
  2296. Factors Contributing to a Flare
  2297. Management: Fibromyalgia
  2298. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2299. CLINICAL TIP
  2300. Myofascial Pain Syndrome
  2301. FIGURE 11.8 Composite pattern of pain (dark red) referred from trigger points (TrPs) (Xs) in the right piriformis muscle (medium red). The lateral X (TrP1) indicates the most common TrP location. The red stippling locates the spillover part of the pattern that may be felt as less intense pain than that of the essential pattern (solid red). The spillover pain may be absent.
  2302. Possible Causes of Trigger Points
  2303. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2304. Management: Myofascial Pain Syndrome
  2305. CLINICAL TIP
  2306. Osteoporosis
  2307. Risk Factors
  2308. Primary osteoporosis.
  2309. Secondary osteoporosis.
  2310. FIGURE 11.9 Osteoporosis of the spine with multiple compression fractures. The arrow points to the T8-T9 disc space, which is deformed by the collapse of these two vertebrae from multiple compression fractures. This 94-year-old woman has severe kyphosis of the thoracic spine (also known as a gibbous deformity) accentuated by vertebral collapse at multiple levels.
  2311. FIGURE 11.10 Osteoporosis is evident in this knee by the accentuation of the remaining trabeculae. The trabeculae have diminished in number and thickness, and the remaining vertically oriented trabeculae stand out as thin, delicate line images.
  2312. Prevention of Osteoporosis
  2313. Physical Activity
  2314. Effects of Exercise
  2315. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2316. Recommendations for Exercise
  2317. Mode: Aerobic
  2318. Frequency.
  2319. Intensity.
  2320. Mode: Resistance
  2321. Frequency.
  2322. Intensity.
  2323. CLINICAL TIP
  2324. Precautions and Contraindications
  2325. CLINICAL TIP
  2326. Fractures and Posttraumatic Immobilization
  2327. TABLE 11.3 Causes and Types of Fractures79
  2328. FIGURE 11.11 (A–F) The position of fracture fragments may be described by how the distal fragment displaces in relationship to the proximal fragment.
  2329. FIGURE 11.12 (A–D) Directions of fracture lines are described in reference to the longitudinal axis of the bone.
  2330. FIGURE 11.13 Comminuted fractures are fractures with more than two fragments. Some frequently occurring comminuted fracture patterns are (A) the wedge-shaped or butterfly pattern and (B) a two- or three-segmented level fracture. (C) Other fractures with multiple fragments, be it several or several hundred, are still described as comminuted.
  2331. BOX 11.5 Symptoms and Signs of a Possible Fracture
  2332. Risk Factors
  2333. Bone Healing Following a Fracture
  2334. Cortical Bone Healing
  2335. Inflammatory Phase
  2336. Reparative Phase
  2337. Remodeling Phase
  2338. Rigid Internal Fixation
  2339. Healing Time
  2340. Cancellous Bone Healing
  2341. Epiphyseal Plate Healing
  2342. Principles of Management: Period of Immobilization
  2343. Local Tissue Response
  2344. BOX 11.6 Types of Abnormal Healing of Fractures
  2345. Immobilization in Bed
  2346. Functional Adaptations
  2347. Postimmobilization
  2348. Impairments
  2349. BOX 11.7 Complications of Fractures10
  2350. BOX 11.8 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Postfracture/Period of Immobilization
  2351. Management: Postimmobilization
  2352. BOX 11.9 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Postfracture/Postimmobilization
  2353. Independent Learning Activities
  2354. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  2355. REFERENCES
  2356. CHAPTER 12 Surgical Interventions and Postoperative Management
  2357. Indications for Surgical Intervention
  2358. BOX 12.1 Indications for Surgery for Musculoskeletal Disorders of the Extremities and Spine
  2359. Guidelines for Preoperative and Postoperative Management
  2360. Considerations for Preoperative Management
  2361. Preoperative Examination and Evaluation
  2362. BOX 12.2 Benefits of Preoperative Contact with a Patient
  2363. Preoperative Patient Education: Methods and Rationale
  2364. Components of Preoperative Patient Education
  2365. An Extended Preoperative Exercise Program
  2366. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2367. Considerations for Postoperative Management
  2368. Postoperative Examination and Evaluation
  2369. Phases of Postoperative Rehabilitation
  2370. BOX 12.3 Factors That Influence the Components, Progression, and Outcomes of a Postoperative Rehabilitation Program
  2371. BOX 12.4 Inspection of the Surgical Incision
  2372. BOX 12.5 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Postoperative Rehabilitation
  2373. Time-Based and Criterion-Based Progression
  2374. Putting Postoperative Rehabilitation into Perspective
  2375. Potential Postoperative Complications and Risk Reduction
  2376. Pulmonary Complications
  2377. Deep Vein Thrombosis and Pulmonary Embolism
  2378. BOX 12.6 Potential Postoperative Complications
  2379. Subluxation or Dislocation after Joint Surgery
  2380. Restricted Motion from Adhesions and Scar Tissue Formation
  2381. Failure, Displacement, or Loosening of Internal Fixation Device
  2382. Deep Vein Thrombosis and Pulmonary Embolism: A Closer Look
  2383. FIGURE 12.1 Veins of the lower extremity.
  2384. Risk Factors for DVT
  2385. Deep Vein Thrombosis: Signs and Symptoms
  2386. Pulmonary Embolism: Signs and Symptoms
  2387. BOX 12.7 Risk Factors for Deep Vein Thrombosis and Thrombophlebitis
  2388. Reducing the Risk of Deep Vein Thrombosis
  2389. CLINICAL TIP
  2390. Management of Deep Vein Thrombosis
  2391. Acute care management.
  2392. BOX 12.8 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Deep Vein Thrombosis and Thrombophlebitis
  2393. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2394. Posthospitalization precautions.
  2395. Overview of Common Orthopedic Surgeries and Postoperative Management
  2396. TABLE 12.1 General Methods and Examples of Musculoskeletal Surgeries
  2397. Surgical Approaches: Open, Arthroscopic, and Arthroscopically Assisted Procedures
  2398. Open Procedure
  2399. Arthroscopic Procedure
  2400. Arthroscopically Assisted Procedure
  2401. Use of Tissue Grafts
  2402. Types of Grafts
  2403. Autograft.
  2404. Allograft.
  2405. Synthetic grafts.
  2406. Repair, Reattachment, Reconstruction, Stabilization, or Transfer of Soft Tissues
  2407. BOX 12.9 Risks with Use of Autografts and Allografts
  2408. Muscle Repair
  2409. Procedure
  2410. Postoperative Management
  2411. Tendon Repair
  2412. Procedure
  2413. Postoperative Management
  2414. Ligament Repair or Reconstruction
  2415. Procedures
  2416. Postoperative Management
  2417. Capsule Stabilization and Reconstruction
  2418. Procedures
  2419. Capsulorrhaphy (capsular shift).
  2420. Capsulolabral reconstruction.
  2421. Electrothermally assisted capsulorrhaphy.
  2422. Postoperative Management
  2423. Tendon Transfer or Realignment
  2424. Procedures
  2425. Postoperative Management
  2426. Release, Lengthening, or Decompression of Soft Tissues
  2427. Procedures
  2428. Postoperative Management
  2429. Joint Procedures
  2430. Arthroscopic Débridement and Lavage
  2431. Synovectomy
  2432. Procedure
  2433. Postoperative Management
  2434. Articular Cartilage Procedures
  2435. Procedures
  2436. Abrasion arthroplasty, subchondral drilling, and microfracture.
  2437. Chondrocyte transplantation.
  2438. Osteochondral autografts and allografts.
  2439. Postoperative Management
  2440. Arthroplasty
  2441. Procedures
  2442. Excision arthroplasty.
  2443. Excision arthroplasty with implant.
  2444. Interposition arthroplasty.
  2445. Joint replacement arthroplasty.
  2446. FIGURE 12.2 Total hip replacement arthroplasty. Both the acetabular and femoral portions of the joint have been replaced with prosthetic components.
  2447. BOX 12.10 Materials, Designs, and Methods of Fixation for Joint Replacement Arthroplasty
  2448. BOX 12.11 Contraindications to Total Joint Arthroplasty
  2449. Postoperative Management
  2450. Arthrodesis
  2451. FIGURE 12.3 Arthrodesis (surgical fusion with internal fixation of the ankle).
  2452. TABLE 12.2 Optimal Positions for Arthrodesis
  2453. Procedure
  2454. Postoperative Management
  2455. Extra-articular Boney Procedures
  2456. Open Reduction and Internal Fixation of Fractures
  2457. Procedures
  2458. Postoperative Management
  2459. FIGURE 12.4 Intertrochanteric fracture of the left femur, fixed with compression plate and screws.
  2460. Osteotomy
  2461. Procedures
  2462. Postoperative Management
  2463. Independent Learning Activities
  2464. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  2465. REFERENCES
  2466. CHAPTER 13 Peripheral Nerve Disorders and Management
  2467. Review of Peripheral Nerve Structure
  2468. Nerve Structure
  2469. Mobility Characteristics of the Nervous System
  2470. FIGURE 13.1 Peripheral nerve and its connective tissue coverings.
  2471. BOX 13.1 Content of Peripheral Nerves
  2472. Common Sites of Injury to Peripheral Nerves
  2473. Nerve Roots
  2474. Brachial Plexus
  2475. FIGURE 13.2 Dermatomes—anterior and posterior views.
  2476. BOX 13.2 Key Muscles for Testing Upper and Lower Quarter Myotomes45
  2477. Peripheral Nerves in the Upper Quarter
  2478. Axillary Nerve: C5, 6
  2479. FIGURE 13.3 Brachial plexus.
  2480. TABLE 13.1 Patterns of Muscle Weakness and Functional Loss with Peripheral Nerve Injuries in the Upper Extremity
  2481. Musculocutaneous Nerve: C5, 6
  2482. Median Nerve: C6–8
  2483. FIGURE 13.4 Sensory and motor innervations of the axillary (C5, 6) and musculocutaneous (C5, 6) nerves.
  2484. Ulnar Nerve: C8, T1
  2485. Radial Nerve: C6–8, T1
  2486. FIGURE 13.5 Sensory and motor innervations of the median nerve (C6–8, T1).
  2487. FIGURE 13.6 Sensory and motor innervations of the ulnar nerve (C8, T1).
  2488. FIGURE 13.7 Sensory and motor innervations of the radial nerve (C6–8, T1).
  2489. Lumbosacral Plexus
  2490. Peripheral Nerves in the Lower Quarter
  2491. FIGURE 13.8 (A) Lumbar plexus and (B) sacral plexus.
  2492. Femoral Nerve: L2–4
  2493. Obturator Nerve: L2–4
  2494. Sciatic Nerve: L4, 5; S1–3
  2495. Tibial/Posterior Tibial Nerve: L4, 5; S1–3
  2496. TABLE 13.2 Patterns of Muscle Weakness and Functional Loss with Peripheral Nerve Injuries in the Lower Extremity
  2497. FIGURE 13.9 Sensory and motor innervations of the femoral (L2–4) and obturator (L2–4) nerves.
  2498. Plantar and calcaneal nerves.
  2499. Common Peroneal Nerve: L4, 5; S1, 2
  2500. FIGURE 13.10 Sensory and motor innervations of the sciatic nerve (L4, 5, S1–3) and tibial nerve (L4, 5, S1–3).
  2501. Superficial peroneal nerve.
  2502. Deep peroneal nerve.
  2503. Impaired Nerve Function
  2504. Nerve Injury and Recovery
  2505. FIGURE 13.11 Sensory and motor innervations of the peroneal nerve (L4, 5, S1, 2).
  2506. Mechanisms of Nerve Injury
  2507. Classification of Nerve Injuries
  2508. Recovery from Nerve Injuries
  2509. BOX 13.3 Seddon’s Classification and Characteristics of Nerve Injury62,63,65
  2510. FIGURE 13.12 Comparison of Sunderland’s and Seddon’s classifications of nerve injuries. (1) First degree injury (neuropraxia): minimal structural disruption—complete recovery; (2) second degree (axonotmesis): complete axonal disruption with wallerian degeneration—usually complete recovery; (3) third degree (may be either axonotmesis or neurotmesis): disruption of axon and endoneurium—poor prognosis without surgery; (4) fourth degree (neurotmesis): disruption of axon, endoneurium, and perineurium—poor prognosis without surgery; (5) fifth degree (neurotmesis): complete structural disruption—poor prognosis without microsurgery.62,65
  2511. Outcomes of Nerve Regeneration
  2512. Management Guidelines: Recovery from Nerve Injury
  2513. Acute Phase
  2514. BOX 13.4 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Recovery from Peripheral Nerve Injury
  2515. Recovery Phase
  2516. Chronic Phase
  2517. BOX 13.5 Desensitization and Sensory Re-education Techniques
  2518. BOX 13.6 Patient Instructions for Preventive Care After Nerve Injury
  2519. Neural Tension Disorders
  2520. Symptoms and Signs of Impaired Nerve Mobility
  2521. History
  2522. Tests of Provocation
  2523. General testing procedure:
  2524. Causes of Symptoms
  2525. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2526. Principles of Management
  2527. CLINICAL TIP
  2528. Precautions and Contraindications to Neural Tension Testing and Treatment
  2529. PRECAUTIONS:
  2530. CONTRAINDICATIONS:
  2531. Neural Testing and Mobilization Techniques for the Upper Quadrant
  2532. Median Nerve (Fig. 13.13)
  2533. Patient position and procedure:
  2534. FIGURE 13.13 Position of maximum stretch on the median nerve includes shoulder girdle depression; shoulder abduction; elbow extension; shoulder external rotation and supination of the forearm; wrist, finger, and thumb extension; and finally contralateral cervical side flexion.
  2535. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2536. Radial Nerve (Fig. 13.14)
  2537. FIGURE 13.14 Position of maximum stretch on the radial nerve includes shoulder girdle depression; shoulder abduction; elbow extension; shoulder medial rotation and forearm pronation; wrist, finger, and thumb flexion; wrist ulnar deviation; and finally contralateral cervical side flexion.
  2538. Patient position and procedure:
  2539. Ulnar Nerve (Fig. 13.15)
  2540. FIGURE 13.15 Position of maximum stretch on the ulnar nerve includes shoulder girdle depression; shoulder external rotation and abduction; elbow flexion; forearm supination and wrist extension; and finally contralateral cervical side flexion.
  2541. Patient position and procedure:
  2542. Neural Testing and Mobilization Techniques for the Lower Quadrant
  2543. Sciatic Nerve: Straight-Leg Raising with Ankle Dorsiflexion (Fig. 13.16)
  2544. Patient position and procedure:
  2545. FIGURE 13.16 Position of stretch on the sciatic nerve includes straight-leg raising with adduction and internal rotation of the hip and dorsiflexion of the ankle.
  2546. Slump-Sitting (Fig. 13.17)
  2547. Patient position and procedure:
  2548. FIGURE 13.17 Slump-sitting with neck, thorax, and low back flexed, knee extended, and ankle dorsiflexed just to the point of tissue resistance and symptom reproduction.
  2549. Femoral Nerve: Prone Knee Bend (Fig. 13.18)
  2550. Patient position and procedure:
  2551. FIGURE 13.18 Position of stretch on the femoral nerve; prone lying with the spine neutral, hip extended to zero degrees, and knee flexed. It is important to maintain the spine in neutral and not allow it to extend.
  2552. Alternate position and procedure:
  2553. Musculoskeletal Diagnoses Involving Impaired Nerve Function
  2554. Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
  2555. Related Diagnoses
  2556. FIGURE 13.19 Region of the thoracic outlet bordered medially by the scalene muscle and first rib; posteriorly by the upper trapezius and scapula; anteriorly by the clavicle, coracoid, pectoralis minor, and deltopectoral fascia; and laterally by the axilla.
  2557. Etiology of Symptoms
  2558. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2559. BOX 13.7 Summary of Contributing Factors to Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
  2560. Sites of Compression or Entrapment
  2561. Common Structural and Functional Impairments in TOS
  2562. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  2563. Nonoperative Management of TOS
  2564. BOX 13.8 Summary of Guidelines for Management of Thoracic Outlet Syndrome
  2565. Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
  2566. Etiology of Symptoms
  2567. Examination
  2568. History.
  2569. Positive clinical findings.
  2570. FIGURE 13.20 Boundaries of the carpal tunnel.
  2571. Associated areas to clear.
  2572. Double crush injury.
  2573. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  2574. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  2575. Nonoperative Management of CTS
  2576. BOX 13.9 Summary of Guidelines for Nonoperative Management of Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
  2577. FIGURE 13.21 Positions for median nerve glides and mobilization in the hand: (A) wrist neutral with fingers and thumb flexed; (B) wrist neutral with fingers and thumb extended; (C) wrist and fingers extended, thumb neutral; (D) wrist, fingers, and thumb extended; (E) wrist, fingers, and thumb extended and forearm supinated; (F) wrist, fingers, and thumb extended, forearm supinated, and thumb stretched into extension.
  2578. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2579. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2580. Surgical and Postoperative Management for CTS
  2581. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2582. Maximum Protection Phase
  2583. Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  2584. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2585. Ulnar Nerve Compression in Tunnel of Guyon
  2586. Etiology of Symptoms
  2587. Examination
  2588. History.
  2589. Positive clinical findings.
  2590. Associated areas to clear.
  2591. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  2592. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  2593. Nonoperative Management
  2594. Surgical Release and Postoperative Management
  2595. Complex Regional Pain Syndrome: Reflex Sympathetic Dystrophy and Causalgia
  2596. Related Diagnoses and Symptoms
  2597. Etiology of Symptoms
  2598. BOX 13.10 Classification and Clinical Features of Complex Regional Pain Syndromes64
  2599. Clinical Course
  2600. CLINICAL TIP
  2601. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  2602. FIGURE 13.22 (A) In the early stages of reflex sympathetic dystrophy, generalized edema is present. This edema is often localized over the dorsum of the hand in the metacarpal and proximal interphalangeal joint areas. (B) The edema is usually of a pitting nature, as indicated by the indentation that remains once the pressure is removed.
  2603. Management
  2604. Intervention: Stage I (Box 13.10)
  2605. BOX 13.11 Summary of Guidelines for Management of Complex Regional Pain Syndrome Type I (RSD)
  2606. CLINICAL TIP
  2607. Intervention: Stages II and III
  2608. CLINICAL TIP
  2609. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2610. Independent Learning Activities
  2611. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  2612. Laboratory Practice
  2613. REFERENCES
  2614. IV Exercise Interventions by Body Region
  2615. CHAPTER 14 The Spine: Structure, Function, and Posture
  2616. Structure and Function of the Spine
  2617. Structure
  2618. Functional Components of the Spine
  2619. FIGURE 14.1 (A) Lateral and (B) posterior views showing the five regions of the spinal column.
  2620. FIGURE 14.2 Spinal segment showing (A) the anterior weight-bearing, shock-absorbing portion, and (B) the posterior gliding mechanism and lever system for muscle attachments.
  2621. Motions of the Spinal Column
  2622. FIGURE 14.3 Motions of the spinal column. (A) Flexion/extension (forward/backward bending). (B) Lateral flexion (side bending). (C) Rotation. (D) Anterior/posterior shear. (E) Lateral shear. (F) Distraction/compression.
  2623. The Six Degrees of Motion
  2624. Flexion/Extension.
  2625. Side bending.
  2626. Rotation.
  2627. Anterior/posterior shear.
  2628. Lateral shear.
  2629. Compression/distraction.
  2630. Arthrokinematics of the Zygapophyseal (Facet) Joints
  2631. Cervical spine.
  2632. Thoracic spine.
  2633. TABLE 14.1 Arthrokinematics of the Spine
  2634. Lumbar spine.
  2635. Structure and Function of Intervertebral Discs
  2636. Annulus fibrosus.
  2637. FIGURE 14.4 Nodding motions of the atlanto-occipital joints. (A) Flexion. (B) Extension.
  2638. FIGURE 14.5 Rotation of the atlas-axis joints (view from the side). (A) Right rotation showing backward movement of the right articulating surface of C1 on C2. (B) Left rotation showing forward movement of the right articulating surface of C1 on C2.
  2639. Nucleus pulposus.
  2640. FIGURE 14.6 Intervertebral disc. (A) The annular rings enclose the nucleus pulposus, providing a mechanism for dissipating compressive forces. (B) Orientation of the layers of the annulus provides tensile strength to the disc with motions in various directions.
  2641. Cartilaginous end-plates.
  2642. Intervertebral Foramina
  2643. Biomechanical Influences on Postural Alignment
  2644. Curves of the Spine
  2645. Gravity
  2646. Ankle.
  2647. Knee.
  2648. FIGURE 14.7 Lateral view of standard postural alignment. A plumb line is typically used for reference and represents the relationship of the body parts with the line of gravity. Surface landmarks are slightly anterior to the lateral malleolus, slightly anterior to the axis of the knee joint, through the greater trochanter (slightly posterior to the axis of the hip joint), through the bodies of the lumbar and cervical vertebrae, through the shoulder joint, and through the lobe of the ear.
  2649. Hip.
  2650. Trunk.
  2651. Head.
  2652. Stability
  2653. Postural Stability in the Spine
  2654. Inert Structures: Influence on Stability
  2655. TABLE 14.2 Stabilizing Features of Inert Tissues in the Spine
  2656. Muscles: Influence on Stability
  2657. Role of Global and Segmental Muscle Activity
  2658. Global muscle function.
  2659. FIGURE 14.8 (A) Guy wire function of global trunk muscles provides overall stability against perturbations. (B) Instability in the multisegmental spine cannot be controlled by the global trunk muscle guy wires. Compressive loading from the long guy wires leads to stress on the inert tissues at the end-ranges of the unstable segment.
  2660. Deep/segmental muscle function.
  2661. FIGURE 14.9 Deep muscles attached to each spinal segment provide segmental stability.
  2662. TABLE 14.3 Stabilizing Features of Muscles Controlling the Spine
  2663. Muscle Control in the Lumbar Spine
  2664. TABLE 14.4 Muscles of the Spine and Their Stabilizing Function
  2665. Abdominal muscles (Fig. 14.10).
  2666. Transversus abdominis stabilization activity.
  2667. FIGURE 14.10 Abdominal muscles.
  2668. FIGURE 14.11 Transverse section in the lumbar region shows the relationships of the three layers of the thoracolumbar fascia to the muscles in the region and their attachments to the spine. (ES, erector spinae; Mf, multifidus; TA, transversus abdominis; IO, internal obliques; EO, external obliques; LD, latissimus dorsi; PM, psoas major; QL, quadratus lumborum muscles.)
  2669. FIGURE 14.12 Orientation and attachments of the posterior layer of the thoracolumbar fascia. From the lateral raphe, (A) the fibers of the superficial lamina are angled inferiorly and medially and (B) the fibers of the deep lamina are angled superiorly and medially. (C) Tension in the angled fibers of the posterior layer of the fascia is transmitted to the spinous processes in opposing directions, resisting separation of the spinous processes. (D) Diagrammatic representation of a lateral pull at the lateral raphe, resulting in tension between the lumbar spinous processes that oppose separation, thus providing stability to the spine.
  2670. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2671. Erector spinae muscles (Fig. 14.13).
  2672. Multifidus stabilization activity.
  2673. FIGURE 14.13 Muscles of the back.
  2674. Thoracolumbar (lumbodorsal) fascia.
  2675. Muscle Control in the Cervical Spine
  2676. Mandibular elevator group.
  2677. FIGURE 14.14 Head balance on the cervical spine. The posterior cervical muscles (trapezius and semispinalis capitis) counter the weight of the head. The mandibular elevating muscles (masseter, temporalis, medial pterygoid) maintain jaw elevation opposing the mandibular depression force of gravity and tension in the anterior throat muscles (suprahyoid and infrahyoid groups). The scalene and levator muscles stabilize against the posterior and anterior translatory forces on the cervical vertebrae. (Tr, trapezius; SC, semispinalis capitis; M, masseter; T, temporalis; MT, medial pterygoid; SH, suprahyoid; IH, infrahyoid; S, scalene; LS, levator scapulae; G, center of gravity; ▴ axis of motion.)
  2678. Suprahyoid and infrahyoid group.
  2679. Rectus capitis anterior and lateralis, longus colli, and longus capitis (Fig. 14.15).
  2680. FIGURE 14.15 Deep segmental musculature in the cervical spine: rectus capitis anterior and lateralis, longus colli, longus capitis, and scalene muscles.
  2681. Multifidus.
  2682. Role of Muscle Endurance
  2683. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2684. Neurological Control: Influence on Stability
  2685. Feedforward control and spinal stability.
  2686. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2687. Effects of Limb Function on Spinal Stability
  2688. CLINICAL TIP
  2689. Localized muscle fatigue.
  2690. Muscle imbalances.
  2691. Effects of Breathing on Posture and Stability
  2692. Effects of Intra-abdominal Pressure and the Valsalva Maneuver on Stability
  2693. FIGURE 14.16 Coordinated contraction of the transversus abdominis, diaphragm, and pelvic floor musculature increases intra-abdominal pressure, which unloads the spine and provides stability.
  2694. FIGURE 14.17 (A) Increased intra-abdominal pressure (IAP) pushes outward against the transversus abdominis and internal obliques, creating increased tension on the thoracolumbar fascia, resulting in improved spinal stability. (B) Reduced pressure decreases the stabilizing effect.
  2695. Impaired Posture
  2696. Etiology of Pain
  2697. Effect of Mechanical Stress
  2698. Effect of Impaired Postural Support from Trunk Muscles
  2699. Effect of Impaired Muscle Endurance
  2700. Pain Syndromes Related to Impaired Posture
  2701. Postural fault.
  2702. Postural pain syndrome.
  2703. Postural dysfunction.
  2704. FIGURE 14.18 (A) Lordotic posture characterized by an increase in the lumbosacral angle, increased lumbar lordosis, increased anterior tilting of the pelvis, and hip flexion. (B) Relaxed or slouched posture characterized by excessive shifting of the pelvic segment anteriorly, resulting in hip extension, and shifting of the thoracic segment posteriorly, resulting in flexion of the thorax on the upper lumbar spine. A compensatory increased thoracic kyphosis and forward head placement are also seen. (C) Flat low-back posture characterized by a decreased lumbosacral angle, decreased lumbar lordosis, and posterior tilting of the pelvis. (D) Flat upper back and cervical spine characterized by a decrease in the thoracic curve, depressed scapulae, depressed clavicle, and an exaggeration of axial extension (flexion of the occiput on the atlas and flattening of the cervical lordosis).
  2705. Postural habits.
  2706. Common Faulty Postures: Characteristics and Impairments
  2707. Pelvic and Lumbar Region
  2708. Lordotic Posture
  2709. Potential Muscle Impairments
  2710. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2711. Common Causes
  2712. Relaxed or Slouched Posture
  2713. Potential Muscle Impairments
  2714. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2715. Common Causes
  2716. Flat Low-Back Posture
  2717. Potential Muscle Impairments
  2718. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2719. Common Causes
  2720. Cervical and Thoracic Region
  2721. Round Back (Increased Kyphosis) with Forward Head
  2722. Potential Muscle Impairments
  2723. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2724. Common Causes
  2725. Flat Upper Back and Neck Posture
  2726. Potential Muscle Impairments
  2727. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2728. Common Cause
  2729. Frontal Plane Deviations: Scoliosis and Lower Extremity Asymmetries
  2730. Scoliosis
  2731. Structural scoliosis.
  2732. Nonstructural scoliosis.
  2733. FIGURE 14.19 (A) Mild right thoracic left lumbar structural scoliosis with prominence of the right scapula. (B) Forward bending produces a slight posterior rib hump, indicating fixed rotation of the vertebrae and rib cage.
  2734. Potential Impairments
  2735. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2736. Common Causes: Structural Scoliosis
  2737. Common Causes: Nonstructural Scoliosis
  2738. Frontal Plane Deviations from Lower Extremity Asymmetries
  2739. Characteristic Deviations (Fig. 14.20)
  2740. FIGURE 14.20 Frontal plane asymmetries. Pictured is an individual with a long leg and elevated ilium on the right side. Typically, hip adduction, vertical sacroiliac (SI) joint, side bending toward and rotation opposite that of the lumbar spine, and compensations in thoracic and cervical spine are seen on the long-leg side.
  2741. Potential Muscle Impairments
  2742. Potential Sources of Symptoms
  2743. Common Causes
  2744. Management of Impaired Posture
  2745. General Management Guidelines
  2746. Awareness and Control of Spinal Posture
  2747. Posture Training Techniques
  2748. Axial Extension (Cervical Retraction) to Decrease a Forward Head Posture
  2749. BOX 14.1 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Impaired Posture
  2750. Scapular Retraction
  2751. Pelvic Tilt and Neutral Spine
  2752. FIGURE 14.21 Training the patient to correct (A) forward-head posture and (B) protracted scapulae.
  2753. Thoracic Spine
  2754. Total Spinal Movement and Control
  2755. Reinforcement.
  2756. Postural support.
  2757. Posture, Movement, and Functional Relationships
  2758. Relationship of impaired posture and pain.
  2759. Relationship of impaired posture and extremity function.
  2760. Joint, Muscle, and Connective Tissue Mobility Impairments
  2761. BOX 14.2 Stretching Techniques for Common Mobility Impairments
  2762. Impaired Muscle Performance
  2763. BOX 14.3 Training and Strengthening Techniques for Common Muscle Impairments
  2764. Body Mechanics
  2765. Ergonomics: Relief and Prevention
  2766. BOX 14.4 Functional Exercises in Preparation for Safe Body Mechanics
  2767. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2768. Stress Management/Relaxation
  2769. Muscle Relaxation Techniques
  2770. Cervical and Upper Thoracic Region
  2771. Lower Thoracic and Lumbar Region
  2772. Conscious Relaxation Training for the Cervical Region
  2773. Modalities and Massage
  2774. Healthy Exercise Habits
  2775. Independent Learning Activities
  2776. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  2777. Laboratory Practice
  2778. Case Studies
  2779. Case 1
  2780. Case 2
  2781. REFERENCES
  2782. CHAPTER 15 The Spine: Management Guidelines
  2783. Spinal Pathologies and Impaired Spinal Function
  2784. TABLE 15.1 Spinal Pathologies/Surgical Procedures Related to Preferred Practice Patterns*
  2785. Pathology of the Intervertebral Disc
  2786. Injury and Degeneration of the Disc
  2787. FIGURE 15.1 Disc breakdown, showing (A) breakdown and compression of fibrous layers of the annulus and displacement of disc material; (B) radial fissures/tears with nuclear material bulging against the outer annulus; (C) extrusion of nuclear material through the outer annulus but still in contact with the disc; (D) sequestration of nuclear material beyond the annulus; and (E) magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scan of a 61-year-old patient with low back pain and symptoms radiating into the leg. The scan demonstrates moderate multilevel degenerative disc disease of T12–L1 through L4–5 with mild retrolisthesis of L2 on L3 and L3 on L4. At the L4–5 level, note a small diffuse disc bulge with large paracentral disc extrusion dissecting cranially.
  2788. Fatigue Breakdown and Traumatic Rupture
  2789. Fatigue breakdown.
  2790. Traumatic rupture.
  2791. Axial Overload
  2792. Age
  2793. Degenerative Changes
  2794. Effect on Spinal Mechanics
  2795. Disc Pathologies and Related Conditions
  2796. Tissue Fluid Stasis
  2797. Signs and Symptoms of Disc Lesions and Fluid Stasis
  2798. Etiology of Symptoms
  2799. Pain.
  2800. Neurological signs and symptoms.
  2801. Variability of symptoms.
  2802. Shifting symptoms.
  2803. Inflammation.
  2804. Onset and Behavior of Symptoms from Disc Lesions
  2805. Onset.
  2806. Pain behavior.
  2807. Acute pain.
  2808. Objective Clinical Findings in the Lumbar Spine
  2809. BOX 15.1 Summary of Common Impairments Related to Disc Protrusions in the Lumbar Spine
  2810. FIGURE 15.2 Examples of peripheralization and centralization of lower-quarter symptoms. Viewing the images left to right illustrates peripheralization of symptoms; from right to left illustrates centralization.
  2811. Objective Clinical Findings in the Cervical Spine
  2812. Pathomechanical Relationships of the Intervertebral (IV) Disc and Facet Joints
  2813. Disc Degeneration
  2814. Initial Changes
  2815. Altered Muscle Control
  2816. Progressive Boney Changes
  2817. Related Pathologies
  2818. Segmental (Clinical) Instability
  2819. Stenosis
  2820. Neurological Symptoms: Radiculopathy
  2821. Dysfunction
  2822. Pathology of the Zygapophyseal (Facet) Joints
  2823. Common Diagnoses and Impairments from Facet Joint Pathologies
  2824. Facet Sprain/Joint Capsule Injury
  2825. BOX 15.2 Summary of Common Impairments and Activity Limitations (Functional Limitations) Related to Facet Joint Pathology
  2826. Spondylosis, Osteoarthritis, and Degenerative Joint Disease
  2827. Rheumatoid Arthritis
  2828. Ankylosing Spondylitis (AS)
  2829. Facet Joint Impingement (Blocking, Fixation, Extrapment)
  2830. Pathology of the Vertebrae
  2831. Compression Fracture Secondary to Osteoporosis
  2832. Scheuermann’s Disease
  2833. Pathology of Muscle and Soft Tissue Injuries: Strains, Tears, and Contusions
  2834. BOX 15.3 Summary of Common Impairments and Activity Limitations (Functional Limitations) Associated with Muscle and Soft Tissue Injuries
  2835. General Symptoms from Trauma
  2836. Common Sites of Lumbar Strain
  2837. Common Sites of Cervical Strain
  2838. Extension injuries.
  2839. Flexion injuries.
  2840. Postural Strain
  2841. Emotional Stress
  2842. Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions
  2843. Pathomechanics of Spinal Instability
  2844. Neutral Zone
  2845. Neutral spine.
  2846. FIGURE 15.3 Neutral zone of a spinal segment depicted as a bowl, with the sides of the bowl representing the osteoligamentous tissues and the moving ball representing the segmental mobility. (A) In a deep bowl, when perturbations disturb the ball, there is little motion as the ball rolls back and forth and settles in the center of the bowl—representing stability. (B) In a shallow bowl, there is greater motion—representing greater segmental mobility or instability. (C) Viewing the bowl from above, bungee cords attached to the ball and the sides of the bowl represent the dynamic function of segmental muscles. Appropriately graded tension in the bungee cords stabilizes the ball when perturbations disturb the unit.
  2847. Instability
  2848. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2849. Management Guidelines Based on Stages of Recovery and Diagnostic Categories
  2850. Principles of Management for the Spine
  2851. Examination and Evaluation
  2852. History, systems review, and testing.
  2853. Stage of recovery.
  2854. Diagnosis, prognosis, and plan of care.
  2855. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2856. General Guidelines for Managing Acute Spinal Impairments: Protection Phase
  2857. BOX 15.4 Impairment-Based Diagnostic Categories That Direct Intervention33,48,101,138
  2858. Patient Education
  2859. Symptom Relief or Comfort
  2860. BOX 15.5 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Acute Spinal Impairments/Protection Phase
  2861. Extension bias-extension syndrome.
  2862. Flexion bias-flexion syndrome.
  2863. Nonweight-bearing bias-traction syndrome.
  2864. Kinesthetic Awareness of Safe Postures and Effects of Movement
  2865. BOX 15.6 Examples of Passive Positioning of the Spine
  2866. Muscle Performance: Deep Segmental Muscle Activation and Basic Stabilization
  2867. Lumbar Region: Deep Segmental Muscle Activation
  2868. Cervical Region: Deep Segmental Muscle Activation
  2869. Basic Stabilization
  2870. Basic Functional Movements
  2871. General Guidelines for Managing Subacute Spinal Impairments: Controlled Motion Phase
  2872. Pain Modulation
  2873. BOX 15.7 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Subacute Spinal Problems/Controlled Motion Phase
  2874. Kinesthetic Training
  2875. Stretching/Manipulation
  2876. Muscle Performance
  2877. Cardiopulmonary Conditioning
  2878. Postural Stress Management and Relaxation Exercises
  2879. Functional Activities
  2880. General Guidelines for Managing Chronic Spinal Impairments: Return to Function Phase
  2881. Management Guidelines: Nonweight-Bearing Bias
  2882. Management of Acute Symptoms
  2883. Traction
  2884. BOX 15.8 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Chronic Spinal Problems/Return to Function Phase
  2885. Harness
  2886. Pool
  2887. Progression
  2888. Management Guidelines: Extension Bias
  2889. Principles of Management
  2890. Effects of Postural Changes on Intervertebral Disc Pressure
  2891. Effects of Bed Rest on the Intervertebral Disc
  2892. Effects of Traction on the Intervertebral Disc
  2893. Effects of Flexion and Extension on the Intervertebral Disc and Fluid Stasis
  2894. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2895. Effects of Isometric and Dynamic Exercise
  2896. Effects of Muscle Guarding
  2897. Indications, Precautions, and Contraindications for Interventions: Extension Approach
  2898. Indications.
  2899. Interventions Using an Extension Approach in the Lumbar Spine
  2900. Management of Acute Symptoms
  2901. Extension
  2902. BOX 15.9 Contraindications to Specific Spinal Movements
  2903. Lateral Shift Correction
  2904. FIGURE 15.4 Lumbar extension is accomplished (A) by having the patient prop up on the elbows and (B) by propping on hands and allowing the pelvis to sag.
  2905. FIGURE 15.5 Patient with lateral shift of the thoracic cage toward the right. The pelvis is shifted toward the left.
  2906. FIGURE 15.6 A lateral gliding technique used to correct a lateral shift of the thorax is applied against the patient’s elbow and thoracic cage as the pelvis is pulled in the opposite direction.
  2907. FIGURE 15.7 Standing back bend.
  2908. Patient Education
  2909. FIGURE 15.8 Self-correction of a lateral shift.
  2910. Lumbar Traction
  2911. Joint Manipulation
  2912. Kinesthetic Training, Stabilization, and Basic Functional Activities
  2913. Management When Acute Symptoms Have Stabilized
  2914. Signs of Improvement
  2915. Intervention
  2916. Interventions to Manage a Disc Lesion in the Cervical Spine
  2917. Acute Phase
  2918. Passive Axial Extension (Cervical Retraction)
  2919. Patient Education
  2920. Traction
  2921. Kinesthetic Training for Posture Correction
  2922. Progression as Symptoms Stabilize
  2923. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2924. Disc Lesions: Surgery and Postoperative Management
  2925. Indications for Surgery
  2926. Common Surgeries
  2927. Laminectomy.
  2928. Fusions.
  2929. Procedures
  2930. Anterior cervical disc fusion.
  2931. Outcomes
  2932. Transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion.
  2933. Outcomes
  2934. Laminectomy.
  2935. Postoperative Management
  2936. Maximum Protection Phase
  2937. Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  2938. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2939. Management Guidelines: Flexion Bias
  2940. Principles of Management
  2941. Effect of position.
  2942. Effect of traction.
  2943. Effect of trauma and repetitive irritation.
  2944. Effect of meniscoid tissue.
  2945. Indications and Contraindications for Intervention: Flexion Approach
  2946. Indications.
  2947. Techniques Utilizing a Flexion Approach
  2948. Management of Acute Symptoms
  2949. Rest and Support
  2950. Functional Position for Comfort
  2951. Cervical Traction
  2952. Correction of Lateral Shift
  2953. Correction of Meniscoid Impingements
  2954. FIGURE 15.9 Self-correction of a lateral shift when there is deviation of the trunk as it flexes.
  2955. Management When Acute Symptoms Have Stabilized
  2956. BOX 15.10 Muscle Imbalances Common with Flexion Bias (Syndrome)
  2957. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2958. Management Guidelines: Stabilization
  2959. Identification of Clinical Instability
  2960. Principles of Management
  2961. Passive Support
  2962. Deep Segmental Muscle Activation
  2963. Lumbar Region
  2964. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2965. Cervical Region
  2966. Progression of Stabilization Exercises
  2967. Management Guidelines: Mobilization/Manipulation
  2968. Management: Lumbar Spine
  2969. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2970. Management: Cervical Spine
  2971. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  2972. Management Guidelines: Soft Tissue Injuries
  2973. Management During the Acute Stage: Protection Phase
  2974. Pain and Inflammation Control
  2975. Cervical Region
  2976. Lumbar Region
  2977. Muscle Function
  2978. Cervical Region
  2979. Lumbar Region
  2980. Traction
  2981. Environmental Adaptation
  2982. Management in the Subacute and Chronic Stages of Healing: Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  2983. Management of Regional Diagnoses
  2984. TABLE 15.2 Summary of Interventions for Spinal and Related Pathologies
  2985. Lower Thoracic and Lumbopelvic Region
  2986. Compression Fracture Secondary to Osteoporosis
  2987. Interventions
  2988. Spondylolisthesis
  2989. BOX 15.11 Preventative Measures for Patients with Osteoporosis
  2990. Physical Therapy Interventions
  2991. Ankylosing Spondylitis
  2992. Interventions
  2993. Scheuermann’s Disease
  2994. Interventions
  2995. Rib Subluxation
  2996. Interventions VIDEO 15.1
  2997. FIGURE 15.10 ME technique to correct a posterior rib.
  2998. FIGURE 15.11 ME technique to correct an anterior rib.
  2999. Sacroiliac Joint Dysfunction
  3000. FIGURE 15.12 (A) Normal relationship of the sacrum and innominate, (B) anterior rotated innominate showing the ASIS inferior and PSIS superior, (C) posterior rotated innominate showing the ASIS superior and PSIS inferior, (D) upslipped innominate showing ASIS and PSIS superior on the right compared to contralateral side.
  3001. Identification of SI Joint Impairments
  3002. Interventions VIDEO 15.2
  3003. “Shot-gun” technique.
  3004. FIGURE 15.13 “Shot gun” ME technique.
  3005. Muscle energy techniques to correct an anterior rotated innominate.
  3006. Muscle energy technique to correct a posterior rotated innominate.
  3007. FIGURE 15.14 ME technique of the gluteus maximus to correct an anteriorly rotated innominate bone.
  3008. FIGURE 15.15 ME technique of the rectus femoris to correct a posteriorly rotated innominate bone.
  3009. HVT to treat an upslipped innominate.
  3010. FIGURE 15.16 HVT to correct an upslip of the innominate bone.
  3011. Cervical and Upper Thoracic Region
  3012. Tension Headache/Cervical Headache
  3013. Etiology
  3014. Presenting Signs and Symptoms
  3015. BOX 15.12 History and Symptoms of Cervical Headaches
  3016. Musculoskeletal Impairments
  3017. General Management Guidelines
  3018. Pain Management
  3019. Mobility Impairments and Impaired Muscle Performance
  3020. Mobility and flexibility.
  3021. Cervical stabilization.
  3022. Scapular stabilization and posture.
  3023. Stress Management
  3024. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3025. Prevention.
  3026. Cervical Myelopathy
  3027. Neck Pain
  3028. Temporomandibular Joint Dysfunction
  3029. Structure and Function
  3030. FIGURE 15.17 Structure of the TMJ.
  3031. Motions of the TMJs.
  3032. Signs and Symptoms
  3033. FIGURE 15.18 Mandibular depression: (A) relationship of the condyle, TM disc and glenoid fossa with jaw closed; (B) as the jaw opens the condyle rolls on the TM disc, then (C) the disc and condyle slid anterior on the articular eminence.
  3034. Etiology of Symptoms
  3035. Possible Causes of TMJ Pain
  3036. Relationship to Neck Pain
  3037. Mechanical Imbalances
  3038. Principles of Management and Interventions
  3039. Reduction of Pain and Muscle Guarding
  3040. Soft Tissue Techniques
  3041. Fascial Muscle Relaxation and Tongue Proprioception and Control
  3042. Control of Jaw Muscles and Joint Proprioception
  3043. Stretching Techniques
  3044. Passive Stretching
  3045. Joint Manipulation Techniques VIDEO 15.4
  3046. FIGURE 15.19 Unilateral mobilization of the temporomandibular joint. (A) Distraction is in a caudal direction. (B) Arrow indicates distraction with glide in a caudal, then anterior direction.
  3047. FIGURE 15.20 Bilateral distraction of the temporomandibular joint with the patient supine.
  3048. Reduction of Upper Quarter Muscle Imbalances
  3049. Independent Learning Activities
  3050. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  3051. Laboratory Practice
  3052. Case Studies
  3053. Case 1
  3054. Case 2
  3055. Case 3
  3056. Case 4
  3057. Case 5
  3058. Case 6
  3059. REFERENCES
  3060. CHAPTER 16 The Spine: Exercise and Manipulation Interventions
  3061. Basic Concepts of Spinal Management with Exercise
  3062. Fundamental Interventions
  3063. BOX 16.1 Fundamental Exercise Interventions for Spinal Rehabilitation
  3064. Patient Education
  3065. General Exercise Guidelines
  3066. TABLE 16.1 Spinal Rehabilitation
  3067. Kinesthetic Awareness
  3068. TABLE 16.2 Intervention for Each Phase of Rehabilitation
  3069. Mobility/Flexibility
  3070. Muscle Performance
  3071. Cardiopulmonary Endurance
  3072. Functional Activities
  3073. Kinesthetic Awareness
  3074. Goal.
  3075. Elements of Functional Training: Fundamental Techniques
  3076. Position of Symptom Relief
  3077. Cervical Spine
  3078. Lumbar Spine
  3079. Effects of Movement on the Spine
  3080. Blending of Kinesthetic Training, Stabilization Exercises, and Fundamental Body Mechanics
  3081. Progression to Active and Habitual Control of Posture
  3082. Mobility/Flexibility
  3083. Goal.
  3084. CLINICAL TIP
  3085. Cervical and Upper Thoracic Region: Stretching Techniques
  3086. Techniques to Increase Thoracic Extension
  3087. Self-Stretching
  3088. FIGURE 16.1 Foam roll stretch to increase flexibility of anterior thorax. (A) In the “touchdown” position, the shoulder extensors are also stretched. (B) With the shoulders abducted and laterally rotated, the pectoralis major and other internal rotators are also stretched. For a less intensive stretch, use a rolled towel placed longitudinally under the spine.
  3089. FIGURE 16.2 (A) Increase flexibility of anterior thorax and pectoralis muscles by adducting the scapula and extending the thoracic spine against the back of the chair. Inspiration increases the stretch; (B) facilitate expiration by bringing the elbows together and flexing the spine.
  3090. Techniques to Increase Axial Extension (Cervical Retraction): Scalene Muscle Stretch
  3091. CLINICAL TIP
  3092. Manual Stretching
  3093. FIGURE 16.3 Unilateral active stretching of the scalenus muscles (manual stretch). The patient first performs axial extension, then side-bends the neck opposite and rotates it toward the tight muscles. The therapist stabilizes the head and upper thorax as the patient breathes in, contracting the muscle against the therapist’s resistance. As the patient relaxes, the rib cage lowers and stretches the muscle.
  3094. Self-Stretching
  3095. Techniques to Increase Upper Cervical Flexion: Short Suboccipital Muscle Stretch
  3096. Manual Stretching
  3097. FIGURE 16.4 Stretching the short suboccipital muscles. The therapist stabilizes the second cervical vertebra as the patient slowly nods the head.
  3098. Self-Stretching
  3099. CLINICAL TIP
  3100. Traction as a Stretching Technique
  3101. Manual Traction: Cervical Spine
  3102. FIGURE 16.5 Manual cervical traction: (A) with the fingers of both hands under the occiput; (B) with one hand over the frontal region and the other hand under the occiput; and (C) using a belt to reinforce the hands for the traction force.
  3103. CLINICAL TIP
  3104. Self-Traction: Cervical Spine
  3105. Cervical Joint Manipulation Techniques
  3106. CLINICAL TIP
  3107. Manipulation to Increase Cervical Flexion (Fig. 16.6)
  3108. FIGURE 16.6 Cervical Flexion Manipulation—prone
  3109. Manipulation to Increase Cervical Extension (Fig. 16.7)
  3110. FIGURE 16.7 Cervical Extension Manipulation—prone
  3111. Manipulation to Increase Cervical Rotation (Fig. 16.8)
  3112. FIGURE 16.8 Cervical Rotation Manipulation—prone
  3113. Manipulation to Increase Cervical Rotation and Side Bending (Fig. 16.9) VIDEO 16.1
  3114. FIGURE 16.9 Cervical Rotation and Side-bending Upglide Manipulation—supine
  3115. Manipulation to Increase Cervical Rotation and Side Bending: Alternate Technique (Fig. 16.10) VIDEO 16.1
  3116. FIGURE 16.10 Cervical Rotation and Side-bending Downglide Manipulation—supine
  3117. Muscle Energy Techniques to Increase Craniocervical Mobility
  3118. To Increase Craniocervical Flexion (Fig. 16.11) VIDEO 16.2
  3119. FIGURE 16.11 Muscle Energy: Craniocervical Flexion
  3120. To Increase Craniocervical Rotation (Fig. 16.12) VIDEO 16.2
  3121. FIGURE 16.12 Muscle Energy: Craniocervical Rotation
  3122. Mid and Lower Thoracic and Lumbar Regions: Stretching Techniques
  3123. Techniques to Increase Lumbar Flexion
  3124. Self-Stretching
  3125. FIGURE 16.13 Self-stretching the lumbar erector spinae muscles and tissues posterior to the spine. The patient grasps around the thighs to avoid compression of the knee joints.
  3126. FIGURE 16.14 Stretching of the lumbar spine. (A) The patient performs a posterior pelvic tilt without rounding the thorax. (B) The patient moves the buttocks back over the feet for a greater stretch.
  3127. Techniques to Increase Lumbar Extension
  3128. Self-Stretching
  3129. Techniques to Increase Lateral Flexibility of the Spine
  3130. FIGURE 16.15 Self-stretching of the soft tissues anterior to the lumbar spine and hip joints with the patient (A) prone (using a press-up) and (B) standing.
  3131. FIGURE 16.16 Stretching hypomobile structures on the concave side of the thoracic curve. Illustrated is a patient with a right thoracic left lumbar curve. The therapist stabilizes the pelvis and lumbar spine while the patient actively stretches the thoracic curve by reaching upward on side of concavity and downward on side of convexity.
  3132. FIGURE 16.17 Stretching hypomobile structures on the concave side of a left lumbar curve. The patient stabilizes the upper trunk and thoracic curve as the therapist passively stretches the lumbar curve.
  3133. FIGURE 16.18 (A) Heel-sitting to stabilize the lumbar spine. (B) Hypomobile structures on the concave side of a right thoracic curve are stretched by having the patient reach the arms overhead and then walk the hands toward the convex side.
  3134. FIGURE 16.19 Stretching tight structures on the concave side of a right thoracic curve. The patient is positioned side-lying with a rolled towel at the apex of the convexity. The lumbar spine is stabilized by the therapist.
  3135. FIGURE 16.20 Side-lying over the edge of a mat table to stretch hypomobile structures of a right thoracic scoliosis. The therapist stabilizes the pelvis.
  3136. Techniques to Increase Hip Muscle Flexibility
  3137. Traction as a Stretching Technique
  3138. Manual Traction: Lumbar Spine
  3139. Positional Traction: Lumbar Spine
  3140. FIGURE 16.21 Positional traction for the lumbar spine. (A) Side bending over a 6- to 8-inch roll causes longitudinal traction to the segments on the upward side. (B) Side-bending with rotation adds a distraction force to the facets on the upward side.
  3141. CLINICAL TIP
  3142. Thoracic and Lumbar Joint Manipulation and HVT Techniques
  3143. CLINICAL TIP
  3144. Manipulation Technique to Increase Thoracic Spine Extension (Fig. 16.22) VIDEO 16.3
  3145. FIGURE 16.22 Thoracic Spine Extension Manipulation or HVT—prone: (A) “V-spread” finger placement on transverse processes and (B) force application with hypothenar eminence.
  3146. Manipulation Technique to Increase Thoracic Spine Flexion
  3147. FIGURE 16.23 Thoracic Spine Left Rotation Manipulation or HVT—prone.
  3148. Manipulation to Increase Thoracic Spine Rotation (Fig. 16.23) VIDEO 16.3
  3149. CLINICAL TIP
  3150. Pistol Thrust to Increase Thoracic Spine Mobility (Fig. 16.24) VIDEO 16.4
  3151. FIGURE 16.24 Thoracic spine manipulation: (A) hand placement on thoracic spine using a “pistol grip” and (B) manipulation force against patient’s crossed arms. (C) Pistol grip on a spinal model, showing carpometacarpal joint of thumb on one transverse process and flexed middle phalanx on opposite transverse process.
  3152. Cross-Arm Thrust to Increase Thoracic Spine Mobility (Fig. 16.25)
  3153. FIGURE 16.25 Thoracic spine manipulation using cross-arm thrust
  3154. Fall Thrust to Increase Thoracic Spine Mobility (Fig. 16.26) VIDEO 16.5
  3155. FIGURE 16.26 Thoracic spine manipulation using a fall thrust
  3156. Rib Manipulation for Expiratory Restriction (Fig. 16.27) VIDEO 16.6
  3157. FIGURE 16.27 Expiratory restriction rib manipulation
  3158. Rib Manipulation for Inspiratory Restriction (Fig. 16.28)
  3159. FIGURE 16.28 Inspiratory restriction rib manipulation
  3160. Elevated First Rib Manipulation (Fig. 16.29) VIDEO 16.7
  3161. FIGURE 16.29 Elevated first rib manipulation
  3162. Manipulation Techniques to Increase Lumbar Spine Extension (Fig. 16.30) VIDEO 16.8
  3163. FIGURE 16.30 Lumbar spine extension manipulation/HVT—prone
  3164. Manipulation to Increase Lumbar Spine Rotation (Fig. 16.31) VIDEO 16.8
  3165. FIGURE 16.31 Lumbar spine left rotation manipulation/HVT—prone
  3166. Manipulation to Increase Lumbar Intervertebral Side Bending (Fig. 16.32) VIDEO 16.9
  3167. FIGURE 16.32 Lumbar spine side-bending manipulation—sidelying
  3168. HVT Lumbar Roll to Increase Lumbar Rotation (Fig. 16.33) VIDEO 16.10
  3169. FIGURE 16.33 Lumbar roll HVT: (A) monitor motion at the spine as the hip is flexed then stabilized by the therapist’s trunk; (B) rotate the patient’s trunk backward to take up the slack, and apply a rotational force through the lower spine by moving the innominate forward; (C) rotational forces applied to the segment above and below, including the innominate, demonstrated on a spine model.
  3170. SI Joint Manipulation Technique to Increase Sacral Nutation (Flexion) (Fig. 16.34) VIDEO 16.11
  3171. FIGURE 16.34 SI Nutation (Flexion) Manipulation.
  3172. SI Joint Manipulation Technique to Increase Sacral Counternutation (Extension) (Fig. 16.35) VIDEO 16.11
  3173. FIGURE 16.35 SI Counternutation (Extension) Manipulation
  3174. Posterior Rotation Manipulation to Innominate (Fig. 16.36) VIDEO 16.11
  3175. FIGURE 16.36 Posterior Rotation Innominate Manipulation
  3176. Muscle Performance: Stabilization, Muscle Endurance, and Strength Training
  3177. Goals.
  3178. Stabilization Training: Fundamental Techniques and Progressions
  3179. FIGURE 16.37 Exercises to improve muscle performance, cardiopulmonary endurance, and functional activities are integrated over a background of activating the deep segmental and global multi-segmental spinal stabilizing musculature.
  3180. CLINICAL TIP
  3181. Guidelines for Stabilization Training
  3182. BOX 16.2 Guidelines for Stabilization Training: Principles and Progression
  3183. Deep Segmental Muscle Activation and Training
  3184. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3185. Cervical Musculature
  3186. FIGURE 16.38 Axial extension (cervical retraction) involves the motion of capital flexion and movement of the lower cervical and upper thoracic spine toward extension, resulting in slight flattening of the cervical lordosis and “lifting” of the head.
  3187. Deep Neck Flexors: Activation and Training VIDEO 16.12
  3188. FIGURE 16.39 (A) The StabilizerTM pressure biofeedback unit (© 2006 Encore Medical, L.P.) is used to provide visual feedback to the patient while training for spinal stabilization. (B) Stabilizer folded into thirds under the cervical spine to test and train capital flexion with neutral spine axial extension.
  3189. BOX 16.3 Testing and Training Deep Segmental Muscle Activation in the Cervical Spine
  3190. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3191. Lower Cervical and Upper Thoracic Extensor Activation and Training
  3192. Progression
  3193. FIGURE 16.40 Axial extension (cervical retraction) exercises.
  3194. Lumbar Musculature
  3195. FIGURE 16.41 Three methods to activate the stabilizing musculature in the lumbar spine. (A) Drawing-in maneuver in which the patient hollows the abdominal region (“draws” the belly button toward the spine). (B) Abdominal bracing in which setting the abdominal muscles results in flaring laterally around the waist. (C) Posterior pelvic tilt in which the pelvis is actively tilted posteriorly and the lumbar spine flattens.
  3196. Drawing-In Maneuver (Abdominal Hollowing Exercise) for Transverse Abdominis Activation VIDEO 16.13
  3197. FIGURE 16.42 Palpation of the transversus abdominis (TA) muscle just distal to the ASIS and lateral to the rectus abdominis muscle. The TA feels like a tense sheet (a bulge is the internal oblique) when performing a gentle drawing-in maneuver.
  3198. Abdominal Bracing
  3199. Posterior Pelvic Tilt
  3200. Multifidus Activation and Training VIDEO 16.14
  3201. BOX 16.4 Testing and Training Deep Segmental Muscle Activation (Transversus Abdominis) in the Lumbar Spine
  3202. FIGURE 16.43 Palpation of the multifidus muscle lateral to the spinous processes in the lumbar spine, (A) bilaterally in the supine position and (B) unilaterally in the side-lying position.
  3203. Progression
  3204. Global Muscle Stabilization Exercises
  3205. Stabilization Exercises for the Cervical Region
  3206. Stabilization with Progressive Limb Loading
  3207. Variations and Progressions in the Stabilization Program
  3208. TABLE 16.3 Cervical Stabilization with Progressive Limb Loading—Emphasis on Cervical Flexors VIDEO 16.15
  3209. FIGURE 16.44 Limb loading for basic stabilization progression of cervical musculature in the supine position. Maximum protection phase: (A) shoulder flexion to 90°; (B) shoulder abduction to 90°; (C) shoulder external rotation arms at the side. Moderate protection phase: (D) shoulder flexion and abduction to end-range; (E) diagonal patterns.
  3210. Integration of Stabilization Exercises and Posture Training
  3211. Progression of Isometric and Dynamic Strengthening in Conjunction with Functional Activities
  3212. TABLE 16.4 Cervical Stabilization with Progressive Limb Loading—Emphasis on Cervical and Thoracic Extensors VIDEO 16.16
  3213. FIGURE 16.45 Limb loading for basic stabilization progression of cervical musculature in prone position. Maximum protection phase: (A) arms at side, shoulder lateral rotation, and scapular adduction; (B) arms at 90/90, horizontal abduction, and scapular adduction. Moderate protection phase: (C) shoulder elevation full range, (D) shoulders 90° with lateral rotation and elbow extended, horizontal abduction, and scapular adduction.
  3214. FIGURE 16.46 Unstable surfaces provide increased challenges to the cervical stabilizing musculature, requiring greater control. Examples include performing upper extremity motions, such as diagonal patterns (A) while sitting on a gym ball, (B) while quadruped over a gym ball, and (C) while pressing a ball against the wall. Use of external resistance is also illustrated.
  3215. Stabilization Exercises for the Lumbar Region
  3216. Stabilization with Progressive Limb Loading
  3217. TABLE 16.5 Basic Lumbar Stabilization with Progressive Limb Loading—Emphasis on Abdominals
  3218. FIGURE 16.47 Bent-leg fall out. Level 2 limb loading for basic stabilization of the abdominal muscles in the supine position. This requires control to prevent pelvic rotation; stability is assisted by the opposite lower extremity while hook-lying. VIDEO 16.17
  3219. BOX 16.5 Instructions for use of StabilizerTM for Stabilization Training with Leg Loading
  3220. FIGURE 16.48 Limb loading for basic stabilization progression of the abdominal muscles in the supine position, levels 3 to 6. Level 3, stability assisted by opposite extremity in hook-lying position; level 4, stability assisted by patient holding opposite leg at 90°; level 5, stability challenged by patient actively holding opposite leg at 90°; level 6, stability challenged with both lower extremities moving. (A) Bent leg lift to 90°. (B) Heel slide to extend knee. (C) Straight-leg lift to 45°. VIDEO 16.18
  3221. TABLE 16.6 Basic Lumbar Stabilization with Progressive Limb Loading: Emphasis on Trunk Extensors
  3222. FIGURE 16.49 Limb loading for basic stabilization progression of the lumbar extensors. Begin in the quadruped position and progress the intensity by (A) flexing one UE; (B) extending one LE with a leg slide; (C) extending one LE by lifting it off the mat; (D) flexing one UE while extending contralateral LE and then alternate to opposite extremities. Progress to prone: (E) extending one LE; (F) extending both LE; and (G) lifting head, arms, and trunk. VIDEO 16.19
  3223. CLINICAL TIP
  3224. Variations and Progressions in the Stabilization Exercise Program
  3225. FIGURE 16.50 Balancing a rod on the back while doing quadruped exercises provides reinforcement that the trunk is not twisting. (A) Single leg slides. (B) Lifting the opposite arm and leg simultaneously, then alternating extremities.
  3226. FIGURE 16.51 (A) Alternating LE motions with the “modified bicycle” or (B) reciprocal and alternating patterns using the UE and LE simultaneously require a strong controlling action in the abdominals.
  3227. Quadratus Lumborum: Stabilization Exercises VIDEO 16.22
  3228. FIGURE 16.52 Developing the stabilizing action of the abdominal muscles by using pull-down activities against a resistive force from pulleys or elastic bands. This exercise can also be done sitting or standing to increase the challenge to the muscles in less stable positions.
  3229. FIGURE 16.53 Using elastic resistance to train and strengthen the abdominal muscles in the upright position. The drawing-in maneuver to set the deep segmental stabilizing muscles precedes the movement of the arms forward against the resistance.
  3230. FIGURE 16.54 Using elastic resistance to train and strengthen the back extensor muscles to stabilize in the upright position (A) diagonal patterns while sitting on an unstable surface and (B) while standing.
  3231. FIGURE 16.55 Strength, balance, and coordination are required to maintain spinal stabilization while sitting on a gym ball and moving the extremities. This activity is progressed by adding weights to the extremities.
  3232. FIGURE 16.56 Activation of the stabilizing trunk muscles occurs to maintain balance on a foam roll while the extremities move in various planes: (A) shoulder horizontal abduction/adduction and (B) ipsilateral hip and shoulder flexion/extension are shown. Weights are added to increase the challenge.
  3233. FIGURE 16.57 Quadratus lumborum stabilization training using side-propping (side plank) (A) on the elbow and knee and (B) on the hand and foot.
  3234. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3235. Progression to Dynamic Exercises
  3236. Isometric and Dynamic Exercises
  3237. Exercises for the Cervical Region
  3238. Isometric Exercises: Self-Resistance
  3239. FIGURE 16.58 Self-resistance for isometric (A) cervical flexion and (B) axial extension.
  3240. Isometric Resistance Activities
  3241. Dynamic Cervical Flexion
  3242. CLINICAL TIP
  3243. FIGURE 16.59 Training the short cervical flexors while de-emphasizing the sternocleidomastoid for cervical flexion to regain a balance in strength for anterior cervical stabilization.
  3244. Manual Resistance: Cervical Muscles
  3245. Intermediate and Advanced Training
  3246. Transitional Stabilization for the Cervical and Upper Thoracic Regions
  3247. Functional Exercises
  3248. FIGURE 16.60 Advanced exercises for strengthening the cervical and upper thoracic flexors and extensors as stabilizers. Begin by (A) sitting on a large gym ball, then (B) walking forward while rolling the ball up the back. With the ball behind the mid-thoracic area, the cervical flexors must stabilize. Continue walking forward until the ball is (C) under the head; the cervical extensors now must stabilize. Walk back and forth between the two positions (B and C) to alternate control between the flexors and extensors. Progress by adding arm motions or arm motions with weights to increase resistance.
  3249. Exercises for the Thoracic and Lumbar Regions
  3250. Alternating Isometric Contractions and Rhythmic Stabilization VIDEO 16.23
  3251. FIGURE 16.61 Alternating isometric resistance applied in the sagittal, frontal, and horizontal planes with the patient supine to stimulate the stabilizing function of the trunk musculature.
  3252. Dynamic Strengthening: Abdominal Muscles
  3253. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3254. Trunk Flexion (Abdominals): Supine
  3255. Curl-ups.
  3256. FIGURE 16.62 The curl-up exercise to strengthen the abdominal muscles. The thorax is flexed on the lumbar spine. The arms are shown in the position of least resistance. Progress by crossing the arms across the chest and then behind the head.
  3257. Curl-downs.
  3258. Diagonal curl-ups.
  3259. Curl-ups on an unstable surface.
  3260. FIGURE 16.63 Curl-ups on an unstable surface. The unstable surface increases activity in the oblique and rectus abdominis muscles.
  3261. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3262. Double knee-to-chest.
  3263. Pelvic lifts.
  3264. FIGURE 16.64 Strengthening the abdominal muscles by flexing the hip and pelvis on the lumbar spine. The legs are shown in the position for least resistance. Progress by decreasing the angle of hip flexion until the legs can be lifted with the knees extended, as in the pelvic lift.
  3265. FIGURE 16.65 Pelvic lifts. Elevating the legs upward toward the ceiling by raising the buttocks off the floor emphasizes strengthening the lower abdominal muscles.
  3266. Bilateral straight-leg raising.
  3267. Bilateral straight-leg lowering.
  3268. Trunk Flexion (Abdominals): Sitting or Standing
  3269. FIGURE 16.66 Standing trunk flexion against elastic material to strengthen the abdominal muscles. The patient performs a posterior pelvic tilt and then approximates the ribs toward the pubis.
  3270. Dynamic Strengthening: Erector Spinae and Multifidus Muscles
  3271. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3272. Extension Exercises in Prone or Quadruped Position
  3273. Thoracic elevation.
  3274. Leg lifts.
  3275. FIGURE 16.67 Strengthening the back extensors with the arms in position to provide maximal resistance. Additional resistance can be provided by holding weights in the hands.
  3276. “Superman.”
  3277. FIGURE 16.68 Strengthen the trunk and hip extensors by lifting the trunk and legs off the mat simultaneously. Greater resistance can be provided by abducting the shoulders to 90° or by elevating them to 180° (“Superman”).
  3278. Variations.
  3279. Extension Exercises Sitting or Standing
  3280. Elastic resistance or weighted pulleys.
  3281. FIGURE 16.69 Using elastic resistance for concentric eccentric back extension.
  3282. FIGURE 16.70 Rotation with extension strengthens the back extensors in functional patterns.
  3283. Trunk Side Bending (Lateral Abdominals, Erector Spinae, Quadratus Lumborum)
  3284. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3285. FIGURE 16.71 Antigravity strengthening of the lateral trunk musculature. (A) There is less resistance if the top arm is at the side and the bottom arm is folded across the chest. (B) Increase resistance by positioning the arms behind the head.
  3286. Cardiopulmonary Endurance
  3287. Goal.
  3288. BOX 16.6 Summary of Aerobic Conditioning Principles
  3289. Common Aerobic Exercises and Effects on the Spine
  3290. Cycling
  3291. Walking and Running
  3292. Stair Climbing
  3293. Cross-Country Skiing and Ski Machines
  3294. Swimming
  3295. Breast stroke.
  3296. Freestyle.
  3297. Backstroke.
  3298. Butterfly stroke.
  3299. Upper Body Ergometers
  3300. Step Aerobics and Aerobic Dancing
  3301. “Latest Popular Craze”
  3302. Functional Activities
  3303. Goal.
  3304. Early Functional Training: Fundamental Techniques
  3305. Rolling.
  3306. Supine to sit/sit to lying down.
  3307. Sit to stand/stand to sit.
  3308. In and out of a car.
  3309. Walking.
  3310. Preparation for Functional Activities: Basic Exercise Techniques
  3311. Weight-Bearing Exercises
  3312. Modified Bridging Exercises
  3313. Push-Ups with Trunk Stabilization
  3314. FIGURE 16.72 Holding a bridge to develop trunk control and gluteus maximus strength while superimposing extremity motions by (A) marching in place and (B) extending the extremities. Adding weights to the arms or legs requires greater strength and control.
  3315. FIGURE 16.73 Push-up activities with the lower extremities balanced on a gym ball for strengthening the arms and developing trunk control.
  3316. Wall Slides
  3317. Partial Lunges, Partial Squats, and Steps
  3318. Walking Against Resistance
  3319. Transitional Stabilization Exercises
  3320. FIGURE 16.74 Wall slides/partial squats to develop LE strength and coordinate with trunk stability in preparation for training body mechanics. (A) The back sliding down a wall, with bilateral arm motion for added resistance. (B) Rolling a gym ball down the wall, with antagonistic arm motion to develop coordination.
  3321. Quadruped Forward/Backward Shifting
  3322. Squatting and Reaching
  3323. Shifting Weight and Turning
  3324. Body Mechanics and Environmental Adaptations
  3325. Principles of Body Mechanics: Instruction and Training
  3326. Lumbar Spine Position
  3327. Spinal flexion.
  3328. Spinal extension.
  3329. Load Position
  3330. Environmental Adaptations
  3331. Home, Work, and Driving Considerations
  3332. Sleeping Environment
  3333. Intermediate to Advanced Exercise Techniques for Functional Training
  3334. Repetitive Lifting
  3335. Repetitive Reaching
  3336. Repetitive Pushing and Pulling
  3337. Rotation or Turning
  3338. Transitional Movements
  3339. Transfer of Training
  3340. Patient Education for Prevention
  3341. Independent Learning Activities
  3342. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  3343. Laboratory Practice
  3344. Case Studies
  3345. REFERENCES
  3346. CHAPTER 17 The Shoulder and Shoulder Girdle
  3347. Structure and Function of the Shoulder Girdle
  3348. FIGURE 17.1 Bones and joints of the shoulder girdle complex.
  3349. Joints of the Shoulder Girdle Complex
  3350. Synovial Joints
  3351. Glenohumeral Joint
  3352. FIGURE 17.2 Ligaments of the glenohumeral (GH) and acromioclavicular (AC) joints.
  3353. Arthrokinematics
  3354. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3355. BOX 17.1 Summary of Joint Arthrokinematics of the GH Joint
  3356. Stability
  3357. TABLE 17.1 Static and Dynamic Stabilizers of the Scapula and Glenohumeral Joint
  3358. FIGURE 17.3 Lateral aspect of the glenoid fossa (interior view), showing attachments of the glenoid labrum, capsule, and ligaments as well as their relationship to the rotator cuff and long head of the biceps brachii musculature.
  3359. Acromioclavicular Joint
  3360. Arthrokinematics
  3361. Stability
  3362. Sternoclavicular Joint
  3363. FIGURE 17.4 Ligaments of the sternoclavicular (SC) joint.
  3364. Arthrokinematics
  3365. Stability
  3366. Functional Articulations
  3367. Scapulothoracic Articulation
  3368. Motions of the Scapula
  3369. BOX 17.2 Summary of Arthrokinematics of the SC Joint
  3370. FIGURE 17.5 Scapular motions. (A) Elevation occurs with clavicular elevation at the SC joint when shrugging. (B) Protraction (abduction) occurs with clavicular abduction at the SC joint when reaching forward. (C) Upward rotation occurs with clavicular rotation at the SC and AC joints when flexing and abducting the shoulder. (D) Forward tilting (along with downward rotation) occurs at the AC joint when extending and internally rotating the shoulder.
  3371. Scapular Stability
  3372. Postural relationship.
  3373. Active arm motions.
  3374. Faulty posture.
  3375. FIGURE 17.6 Faulty forward head, thoracic kyphosis, and shoulder girdle posture result in a forward tilt and downward rotation of the scapula with relative abduction and internal rotation of the humerus when the arm is in a dependent position.
  3376. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3377. Suprahumeral (Subacromial) Space
  3378. FIGURE 17.7 The supraspinatus and subacromial/subdeltoid bursa lie in the suprahumeral space.
  3379. Shoulder Girdle Function
  3380. Scapulohumeral Rhythm
  3381. Clavicular Elevation and Rotation with Humeral Motion
  3382. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3383. External Rotation of the Humerus with Elevation
  3384. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3385. Deltoid–Short Rotator Cuff and Supraspinatus Mechanisms
  3386. Referred Pain and Nerve Injury
  3387. Common Sources of Referred Pain in the Shoulder Region
  3388. Cervical Spine
  3389. Referred Pain from Related Tissues
  3390. Nerve Disorders in the Shoulder Girdle Region
  3391. Brachial plexus in the thoracic outlet.
  3392. Suprascapular nerve in the suprascapular notch.
  3393. Radial nerve in the axilla.
  3394. Management of Shoulder Disorders and Surgeries
  3395. Joint Hypomobility: Nonoperative Management
  3396. Glenohumeral Joint
  3397. TABLE 17.2 Shoulder Pathologies/Surgical Procedures and Preferred Practice Patterns
  3398. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  3399. Rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis.
  3400. Traumatic arthritis.
  3401. Postimmobilization arthritis or stiff shoulder.
  3402. Idiopathic frozen shoulder.
  3403. Clinical Signs and Symptoms
  3404. Glenohumeral joint arthritis.
  3405. Idiopathic frozen shoulder.
  3406. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3407. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations and Disabilities)
  3408. Glenohumeral Joint Hypomobility: Management—Protection Phase
  3409. Control Pain, Edema, and Muscle Guarding
  3410. Maintain Soft Tissue and Joint Integrity and Mobility
  3411. CLINICAL TIP
  3412. Maintain Integrity and Function of Associated Regions
  3413. CLINICAL TIP
  3414. GH Joint Hypomobility: Management—Controlled Motion Phase
  3415. Control Pain, Edema, and Joint Effusion
  3416. Progressively Increase Joint and Soft Tissue Mobility
  3417. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3418. FIGURE 17.8 Self-mobilization. Caudal glide of the humerus occurs as the person leans away from the fixed arm.
  3419. FIGURE 17.9 Self-mobilization. Anterior glide of the humerus occurs as the person leans between the fixed arms.
  3420. FIGURE 17.10 Self-mobilization. Posterior glide of the humerus occurs as the person shifts his weight downward between the fixed arms.
  3421. Inhibit Muscle Spasm and Correct Faulty Mechanics
  3422. FIGURE 17.11 Poor mechanics with the patient hiking the shoulder while trying to abduct it, thus failing to upwardly rotate the scapula and elevating rather than depressing the humeral head.
  3423. Improve Joint Tracking
  3424. FIGURE 17.12 Mobilization with movement (MWM) to improve external rotation. A posterolateral glide is applied to the humeral head while the patient pushes the arm into the end-range of external rotation with a cane.
  3425. FIGURE 17.13 MWM to improve internal rotation. An inferior glide is applied to the humerus while the patient pulls the hand up the back with a towel.
  3426. Improve Muscle Performance
  3427. GH Joint Hypomobility: Management—Return to Function Phase
  3428. Progressively Increase Flexibility and Strength
  3429. Prepare for Functional Demands
  3430. GH Joint Management: Postmanipulation Under Anesthesia
  3431. Acromioclavicular and Sternoclavicular Joints
  3432. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  3433. Overuse syndromes.
  3434. Subluxation or dislocation.
  3435. Hypomobility.
  3436. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3437. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  3438. Nonoperative Management of AC or SC Joint Strain or Hypermobility
  3439. Nonoperative Management of AC or SC Joint Hypomobility
  3440. Glenohumeral Joint Surgery and Postoperative Management
  3441. Glenohumeral Arthroplasty
  3442. FIGURE 17.14 Postoperative anterior-posterior view of the shoulder showing a Neer II type of cemented humeral prosthesis and a nonmetal backed polyethylene glenoid.
  3443. Indications for Surgery
  3444. Procedures
  3445. Background
  3446. Implant design, materials, and fixation.
  3447. Selection of procedure.
  3448. BOX 17.3 Designs of Prosthetic Implants for Total Shoulder Arthroplasty
  3449. Operative Procedures
  3450. Complications
  3451. Postoperative Management
  3452. Special Considerations
  3453. Integrity of the rotator cuff.
  3454. BOX 17.4 Complications Specific to Glenohumeral Arthroplasty
  3455. Intraoperative ROM.
  3456. Posture.
  3457. Immobilization and Postoperative Positioning
  3458. Exercise Progression
  3459. BOX 17.5 Positioning After Shoulder Arthroplasty: Early Postoperative (Maximum Protection) Phase
  3460. TABLE 17.3 Comparison of Exercise Guidelines and Precautions Following Total Shoulder Arthroplasty and Reverse Total Shoulder Arthroplasty
  3461. CLINICAL TIP
  3462. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  3463. Goals and interventions.
  3464. BOX 17.6 Precautions for the Maximum Protection Phase of Rehabilitation Following Shoulder Arthroplasty
  3465. Criteria to progress.
  3466. Exercise: Moderate Protection/Controlled Motion Phase
  3467. Goals and interventions.
  3468. Criteria to progress.
  3469. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  3470. Goals and interventions.
  3471. Outcomes
  3472. Pain relief.
  3473. ROM and functional use of the upper extremity.
  3474. Painful Shoulder Syndromes (Rotator Cuff Disease and Impingement Syndromes): Nonoperative Management
  3475. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  3476. Intrinsic Impingement: Rotator Cuff Disease
  3477. BOX 17.7 Categories of Painful Shoulder Syndromes
  3478. Extrinsic Impingement: Mechanical Compression of Tissues
  3479. FIGURE 17.15 Decrease in the suprahumeral space during repetitive elevation activities leads to symptoms of impingement.
  3480. Primary extrinsic impingement.
  3481. Secondary extrinsic impingement.
  3482. FIGURE 17.16 Classifications of the acromion by shape: (A) type I (flat); (B) type II (curved); (C) type III (hooked).
  3483. Internal extrinsic impingement.
  3484. Tendonitis/Bursitis
  3485. Supraspinatus tendonitis.
  3486. Infraspinatus tendonitis.
  3487. Bicipital tendonitis.
  3488. Bursitis (subdeltoid or subacromial).
  3489. Other Impaired Musculotendinous Tissues
  3490. Insidious (Atraumatic) Onset
  3491. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3492. Impaired Posture and Muscle Imbalances
  3493. BOX 17.8 Summary of Common Impairments with Rotator Cuff Disease and Impingement Syndromes
  3494. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3495. Decreased Thoracic ROM
  3496. CLINICAL TIP
  3497. Rotator Cuff Overuse and Fatigue
  3498. Muscle Weakness Secondary to Neuropathy
  3499. Hypomobile Posterior GH Joint Capsule
  3500. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  3501. Management: Painful Shoulder Syndromes
  3502. Management: Protection Phase
  3503. Control Inflammation and Promote Healing
  3504. Patient Education
  3505. Maintain Integrity and Mobility of the Soft Tissues
  3506. Control Pain and Maintain Joint Integrity
  3507. Develop Support in Related Regions
  3508. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3509. Management: Controlled Motion Phase
  3510. Patient Education
  3511. Develop Strong, Mobile Tissues
  3512. Modify Joint Tracking and Mobility
  3513. FIGURE 17.17 MWM to modify joint tracking and improve active elevation. A posterolateral glide is applied to the humeral head (A) manually or (B) with a belt for self-treatment, while the patient actively elevates the humerus. A weight is used to strengthen the muscles through the pain-free range.
  3514. Develop Balance in Length and Strength of Shoulder Girdle Muscles
  3515. Develop Muscular Stabilization and Endurance
  3516. Progress Shoulder Function
  3517. Management: Return to Function Phase
  3518. Increase Muscular Endurance
  3519. Develop Quick Motor Responses to Imposed Stresses
  3520. BOX 17.9 Patient Instructions to Prevent Recurrences of Shoulder Pain
  3521. Progress Functional Training
  3522. Painful Shoulder Syndromes: Surgery and Postoperative Management
  3523. Subacromial Decompression and Postoperative Management
  3524. Indications for Surgery
  3525. Procedures
  3526. Surgical approach.
  3527. Component procedures.
  3528. FIGURE 17.18 Arthroscopic acromioplasty showing the line of resection of the anterior acromion.
  3529. Postoperative Management
  3530. Immobilization
  3531. Exercise Progression
  3532. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  3533. Goals and interventions.
  3534. Criteria to progress.
  3535. Exercise: Moderate Protection Phase
  3536. Goals and interventions.
  3537. CLINICAL TIP
  3538. Criteria to progress.
  3539. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  3540. Goals and interventions.
  3541. Outcomes
  3542. Rotator Cuff Repair and Postoperative Management
  3543. Indications for Surgery
  3544. Procedures
  3545. Type of Repair
  3546. Components of a Rotator Cuff Repair
  3547. Selection of Surgical Procedures
  3548. Postoperative Management
  3549. TABLE 17.4 Factors That Influence Progression of Rehabilitation After Repair of the Rotator Cuff
  3550. Immobilization
  3551. Exercise Progression
  3552. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3553. TABLE 17.5 Relationships of Type and Duration of Immobilization after Arthroscopic and Mini-Open Repair* to the Size of the Rotator Cuff Tear
  3554. BOX 17.10 General Exercise Guidelines and Precautions Following Repair of a Full-Thickness Rotator Cuff Tear
  3555. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  3556. Goals and interventions.
  3557. Criteria to progress.
  3558. Exercise: Moderate Protection Phase
  3559. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3560. Goals and interventions.
  3561. CLINICAL TIP
  3562. Criteria to progress.
  3563. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  3564. Goals and interventions.
  3565. Outcomes
  3566. Pain relief.
  3567. Shoulder ROM.
  3568. Strength.
  3569. Functional abilities.
  3570. Shoulder Instabilities: Nonoperative Management
  3571. Related Pathologies and Mechanisms of Injury
  3572. Atraumatic Hypermobility
  3573. Unidirectional instability.
  3574. Multidirectional instability.
  3575. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3576. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  3577. Traumatic Hypermobility
  3578. Traumatic anterior shoulder dislocation.
  3579. FIGURE 17.19 Lesions associated with traumatic anterior dislocation of the GH joint. A Bankart lesion is a fracture of the anterior rim of the glenoid with the attached labrum. The labrum is pulled away from the anterior glenoid along with a small piece of glenoid. A Hill-Sachs lesion, a compression fracture of the posterolateral humeral head, also may occur.
  3580. Traumatic posterior shoulder dislocation.
  3581. Recurrent Dislocations
  3582. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3583. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  3584. Closed Reduction of Anterior Dislocation
  3585. Management: Protection Phase
  3586. Protect the Healing Tissue
  3587. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3588. Promote Tissue Health
  3589. Management: Controlled Motion Phase
  3590. Provide Protection
  3591. Increase Shoulder Mobility
  3592. FIGURE 17.20 Mobilizing to increase external rotation when an anterior glide is contraindicated. Place the shoulder in resting position, externally rotate it, then apply a grade III distraction force.
  3593. Increase Stability and Strength of Rotator Cuff and Scapular Muscles
  3594. Management: Return to Function Phase
  3595. Restore Functional Control
  3596. Return to Full Activity
  3597. Closed Reduction of Posterior Dislocation
  3598. CLINICAL TIP
  3599. Shoulder Instabilities: Surgery and Postoperative Management
  3600. Glenohumeral Joint Stabilization Procedures and Postoperative Management
  3601. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3602. Indications for Surgery
  3603. Procedures
  3604. Bankart repair.
  3605. Capsulorrhaphy (capsular shift).
  3606. Electrothermally assisted capsulorrhaphy.
  3607. Posterior capsulorrhaphy (posterior or posteroinferior capsular shift).
  3608. Repair of a SLAP lesion.
  3609. Postoperative Management
  3610. General Considerations
  3611. TABLE 17.6 Factors that Influence the Rehabilitation Program After Surgery for Recurrent Instability of the GH Joint
  3612. Immobilization
  3613. Position.
  3614. Duration.
  3615. Exercise Progression
  3616. CLINICAL TIP
  3617. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3618. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  3619. Goals and interventions.
  3620. BOX 17.11 Precautions After Anterior Glenohumeral Stabilization and/or Bankart Repair*
  3621. BOX 17.12 Precautions After Selected Glenohumeral Stabilization Procedures
  3622. Criteria to progress.
  3623. Exercise: Moderate Protection Phase
  3624. Goals and interventions.
  3625. Criteria to progress.
  3626. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  3627. Outcomes
  3628. Recurrence of instability.
  3629. Shoulder ROM.
  3630. Acromioclavicular and Sternoclavicular Joint Stabilization Procedures and Postoperative Management
  3631. Acromioclavicular Joint Stabilization
  3632. Sternoclavicular Joint Stabilization
  3633. Postoperative Management
  3634. Exercise Interventions for the Shoulder Girdle
  3635. Exercise Techniques During Acute and Early Subacute Stages of Tissue Healing
  3636. Early Motion of the Glenohumeral Joint
  3637. Wand Exercises
  3638. FIGURE 17.21 Self-assisted shoulder rotation using a cane (A) with the arm at the side and (B) in scaption. To relieve stress on the anterior capsule, elevate the distal humerus with a folded towel.
  3639. Ball Rolling or Table Top Dusting
  3640. Wall (Window) Washing
  3641. Pendulum (Codman’s) Exercises
  3642. FIGURE 17.22 Pendulum exercises. For gentle distraction, no weight is used. Use of a weight causes a grade III (stretching) distraction force.
  3643. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3644. “Gear Shift” Exercises
  3645. FIGURE 17.23 Gear shift exercise. Self-assisted shoulder rotation using a cane. Flexion/extension and diagonal patterns also can be done.
  3646. Early Motion of the Scapula
  3647. Early Neuromuscular Control
  3648. Multiple-Angle Muscle Setting
  3649. Protected Weight Bearing
  3650. Exercise Techniques to Increase Flexibility and Range of Motion
  3651. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3652. Self-Stretching Techniques to Increase Shoulder ROM
  3653. To Increase Flexion and Horizontal Adduction: Cross-Chest Stretch
  3654. FIGURE 17.24 Self-stretching to increase horizontal adduction.
  3655. To Increase Flexion and Elevation of the Arm
  3656. FIGURE 17.25 (A) Beginning and (B) end positions for self-stretching to increase shoulder flexion with elevation.
  3657. To Increase External (Lateral) Rotation
  3658. FIGURE 17.26 Self-stretching to increase external rotation of the shoulder (A) with the arm at the side using a doorframe and (B) with the arm in the plane of the scapular using a table to stabilize the forearm.
  3659. To Increase Internal Rotation
  3660. FIGURE 17.27 Self-stretching in the “sleeper position” to increase internal rotation of the shoulder using a table to stabilize the humerus.
  3661. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3662. To Increase Abduction and Elevation of the Arm
  3663. FIGURE 17.28 (A) Beginning and (B) end positions for self-stretching to increase shoulder abduction with elevation.
  3664. To Increase Extension of the Arm
  3665. FIGURE 17.29 (A) Beginning and (B) end positions for self-stretching to increase shoulder extension.
  3666. To Increase Internal Rotation, Extension, and Scapular Tilting
  3667. Manual and Self-Stretching Exercises for Specific Muscles
  3668. To Stretch the Latissimus Dorsi Muscle
  3669. Manual Stretch
  3670. Self-Stretch
  3671. To Stretch the Pectoralis Major Muscles
  3672. Manual Stretch
  3673. FIGURE 17.30 Active stretching of the pectoralis major muscle. The therapist gently pulls the elbows posteriorly while the patient breathes in and then holds the elbows at the end-point as the patient breathes out.
  3674. Self-Stretch
  3675. FIGURE 17.31 Self-stretching the pectoralis major muscle with the arms in a reverse-T position to stretch (A) the clavicular portion and in a V-position to stretch (B) the sternal portion.
  3676. FIGURE 17.32 Wand exercises to stretch the pectoralis major muscle.
  3677. FIGURE 17.33 Active stretching of the pectoralis minor muscle. The therapist holds the scapular and coracoid process at the end-point as the patient breathes out.
  3678. To Stretch the Pectoralis Minor Muscle
  3679. Manual Stretch VIDEO 17.1.
  3680. Self-Stretch
  3681. To Stretch the Levator Scapulae Muscle
  3682. Manual Stretch VIDEO 17.1.
  3683. FIGURE 17.34 Stretching of the levator scapulae muscle. The therapist stabilizes the head and scapula as the patient breathes in, contracting the muscle against the resistance. As the patient relaxes, the rib cage and scapula depress, which stretches the muscle.
  3684. Self-Stretch
  3685. FIGURE 17.35 Self-stretching of the levator scapulae muscle (A) using upward rotation of the scapula and (B) using depression of the scapula.
  3686. To Stretch the Upper Trapezius Muscle
  3687. Manual Stretch
  3688. Self-Stretch
  3689. FIGURE 17.36 Self-stretching of the upper trapezius muscle.
  3690. Exercises to Develop and Improve Muscle Performance and Functional Control
  3691. Isometric Exercises
  3692. BOX 17.13 Summary of Exercise Progressions for Shoulder Function
  3693. Scapular Muscles
  3694. Depression (lower trapezius).
  3695. Protraction (serratus anterior).
  3696. Retraction (rhomboids and trapezius).
  3697. FIGURE 17.37 Isometric or dynamic manual resistance to scapular muscles. (A) Resistance to elevation/depression. (B) Resistance to protraction/retraction. Direct the patient to reach across the therapist’s shoulder to protract the scapula while the therapist resists against the coracoid and acromion process. The therapist’s other hand is placed behind the scapula to resist retraction.
  3698. FIGURE 17.38 Isometric or dynamic resistance to shoulder rotation. (A) External rotation with the shoulder in the plane of the scapula. (B) Internal rotation with the shoulder at 90° abduction.
  3699. Multiple-Angle Isometrics: GH Muscles
  3700. External and internal rotation.
  3701. Abduction.
  3702. Scapular plane elevation.
  3703. FIGURE 17.39 Isometric resistance in scapular plane elevation. The shoulder is positioned between 30° and 60° degrees of elevation, and controlled manual resistance is applied against the humerus.
  3704. Extension.
  3705. Adduction.
  3706. Elbow flexion with forearm supination.
  3707. Self-Applied Multiple-Angle Isometrics
  3708. Stabilization Exercises
  3709. FIGURE 17.40 Self-resistance for isometric shoulder (A) flexion, (B) abduction, and (C) rotation.
  3710. FIGURE 17.41 Using a wall to provide resistance for isometric shoulder (A) flexion, (B) abduction, and (C) rotation.
  3711. Open-Chain Stabilization Exercises for the Scapular Muscles VIDEO 17.2.
  3712. Scapular elevation/depression.
  3713. Scapular protraction/depression.
  3714. Scapular upward and downward rotation.
  3715. Open-Chain Stabilization Exercises for the Shoulder Girdle
  3716. FIGURE 17.42 Stabilization exercises. The patient stabilizes with the shoulder girdle musculature (isometrically) against the resistance imposed by the therapist. Resistance to flexion/extension, abduction/ adduction, and rotation is applied in a rhythmic sequence.
  3717. CLINICAL TIP
  3718. Static Closed-Chain (Weight-Bearing) Stabilization Exercises
  3719. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3720. FIGURE 17.43 Closed-chain scapular and glenohumeral stabilization exercises. (A) Bilateral support in a minimal weight-bearing position with both hands against a wall. (B) Unilateral support on a less stable surface (ball). The therapist applies alternating resistance while the patient stabilizes against the resistance, or the therapist applies resistance as the patient moves from side-to-side.
  3721. Dynamic Closed-Chain Stabilization Exercises
  3722. Dynamic Strengthening Exercises: Scapular Muscles
  3723. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3724. Scapular Retraction (Rhomboids and Middle Trapezius)
  3725. FIGURE 17.44 Scapular retraction against handheld resistance in the prone position.
  3726. Scapular Retraction Combined with Shoulder Horizontal Abduction/Extension (Rhomboids, Middle Trapezius, Posterior Deltoid)
  3727. FIGURE 17.45 Horizontal abduction and scapular retraction exercises, with the arms positioned for maximal resistance from gravity. External rotation of the shoulders (thumbs pointing upward) emphasizes the middle and lower trapezius. To progress the exercise further, weights can be placed in the patient’s hands.
  3728. FIGURE 17.46 Corner press-out to strengthen scapular retraction and shoulder horizontal abduction (view from above).
  3729. Scapular Retraction and Shoulder Horizontal Abduction Combined with External Rotation (Rhomboids, Trapezius, Posterior Deltoid, Infraspinatus, Teres Minor)
  3730. FIGURE 17.47 Combined scapular retraction with shoulder horizontal abduction and external rotation against resistance.
  3731. Scapular Protraction (Serratus Anterior)
  3732. CLINICAL TIP
  3733. FIGURE 17.48 Scapular protraction; pushing against elastic resistance.
  3734. FIGURE 17.49 Push-ups with a “plus” to strengthen scapular protraction.
  3735. CLINICAL TIP
  3736. Scapular Depression (Lower Trapezius, Lower Serratus Anterior)
  3737. FIGURE 17.50 Exercises that emphasize the lower trapezius. (A) Shoulder girdle depression against manual resistance. (B) Closed-chain shoulder girdle depression using body weight for resistance.
  3738. Scapular Upward Rotation with Depression (Lower Trapezius, Serratus Anterior)
  3739. FIGURE 17.51 Scapular depression with upward rotation of the scapula against elastic resistance (also activates the upper and middle trapezius and serratus anterior).
  3740. Dynamic Strengthening Exercises: Glenohumeral Muscles
  3741. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3742. Shoulder External Rotation (Infraspinatus, Teres Minor) VIDEO 17.6.
  3743. FIGURE 17.52 Resisted external rotation with (A) the arm at the side using elastic resistance (B) the arm at 90° using a free weight and the patient lying prone, and
  3744. (C) with the shoulder in scapular plane elevation using a free weight and the patient sitting.
  3745. Shoulder Internal Rotation (Subscapularis)
  3746. FIGURE 17.53 Resisted internal rotation of the shoulder using a handheld weight. To resist external rotation, place the weight in the patient’s upper hand.
  3747. Shoulder Abduction and Elevation of the Arm in Scapular Plane (Deltoid and Supraspinatus)
  3748. FIGURE 17.54 Abduction in the plane of the scapula. This is called the “full can” exercise because the shoulder is held in external rotation as if lifting a full can. (A) Front view. (B) Top view. If the shoulder is held in internal rotation, the exercise is called an “empty can” exercise.
  3749. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3750. Shoulder Flexion (Anterior Deltoid, Rotator Cuff, Serratus Anterior)
  3751. FIGURE 17.55 Military press-up. Beginning with the arm at the side in neutral to slight external rotation with elbow flexed and forearm in mid-position (thumb pointing posteriorly), the weight is lifted overhead.
  3752. Shoulder Adduction (Pectoralis Major, Teres Major, Latissimus Dorsi)
  3753. Shoulder Horizontal Adduction (Anterior Deltoid, Coracobrachialis, Pectoralis Major)
  3754. Shoulder Extension (Posterior Deltoid, Latissimus Dorsi, Rhomboids)
  3755. Elbow Flexion (Biceps Brachii)
  3756. Exercises Using Diagonal (PNF) Movement Patterns VIDEO 17.4.
  3757. Functional Progression for the Shoulder Girdle
  3758. FIGURE 17.56 PNF pattern (D2 flexion), emphasizing shoulder flexion, abduction, and external rotation against elastic resistance.
  3759. Exercises Using Combined Movement Patterns with Functional Activities
  3760. FIGURE 17.57 Simulated rowing motion against elastic resistance.
  3761. FIGURE 17.58 Pushing a weighted cart to simulate a functional activity and incorporate proper body mechanics.
  3762. Equipment
  3763. TABLE 17.7 Exercise Devices and Potential Uses for Shoulder Girdle Rehabilitation
  3764. Integration of Functional Activities
  3765. Independent Learning Activities
  3766. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  3767. Laboratory Practice
  3768. Case Studies
  3769. REFERENCES
  3770. CHAPTER 18 The Elbow and Forearm Complex
  3771. Structure and Function of the Elbow and Forearm
  3772. Joints of the Elbow and Forearm
  3773. Elbow Joint Characteristics and Arthrokinematics
  3774. FIGURE 18.1 Bones and joints of the elbow and forearm.
  3775. Humeroulnar Articulation
  3776. Characteristics.
  3777. Arthrokinematics.
  3778. BOX 18.1 Summary of Joint Arthrokinematics of the Elbow and Forearm Joints
  3779. Humeroradial Articulation
  3780. Characteristics.
  3781. Arthrokinematics.
  3782. Ligaments of the Elbow
  3783. Medial (ulnar) collateral ligament.
  3784. FIGURE 18.2 (A) The three parts of the medial (ulnar) collateral ligament are shown on the medial aspect of the right elbow. The musculature and joint capsule have been removed to show the ligament’s attachments. (B) The lateral collateral ligament complex includes the lateral (radial) collateral ligament, lateral ulnar collateral ligament, and annular ligament. The musculature and joint capsule have been removed to show the ligaments’ attachments.
  3785. Lateral (radial) collateral ligament.
  3786. Forearm Joint Characteristics and Arthrokinematics
  3787. Proximal (Superior) Radioulnar Articulation
  3788. Characteristics.
  3789. Arthrokinematics.
  3790. Distal (Inferior) Radioulnar Articulation
  3791. Characteristics.
  3792. Arthrokinematics.
  3793. Muscle Function at the Elbow and Forearm
  3794. Primary Actions at the Elbow and Forearm
  3795. Elbow Flexion
  3796. Brachialis.
  3797. Biceps brachii.
  3798. Brachioradialis.
  3799. Elbow Extension
  3800. Triceps brachii.
  3801. Anconeus.
  3802. Forearm Supination
  3803. Supinator.
  3804. Biceps brachii.
  3805. Brachioradialis.
  3806. Forearm Pronation
  3807. Pronator teres.
  3808. Pronator quadratus.
  3809. Relationship of Wrist and Hand Muscles to the Elbow
  3810. Wrist flexor muscles.
  3811. Wrist extensor muscles.
  3812. Referred Pain and Nerve Injury in the Elbow Region
  3813. Common Sources of Referred Pain into the Elbow Region
  3814. Nerve Disorders in the Elbow Region
  3815. Ulnar nerve.
  3816. Radial nerve.
  3817. Median nerve.
  3818. Management of Elbow and Forearm Disorders and Surgeries
  3819. Joint Hypomobility: Nonoperative Management
  3820. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  3821. TABLE 18.1 Elbow and Forearm Pathologies/Surgical Procedures, and Preferred Practice Patterns
  3822. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3823. Acute stage.
  3824. Subacute and chronic stages.
  3825. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  3826. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Protection Phase
  3827. Educate the Patient
  3828. Reduce Effects of Inflammation or Synovial Effusion and Protect the Area
  3829. CLINICAL TIP
  3830. Maintain Soft Tissue and Joint Mobility
  3831. Maintain Integrity and Function of Related Areas
  3832. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Controlled Motion Phase
  3833. Increase Soft Tissue and Joint Mobility
  3834. BOX 18.2 Precautions Following Traumatic Injury to the Elbow
  3835. CLINICAL TIP
  3836. CLINICAL TIP
  3837. CLINICAL TIP
  3838. Improve Joint Tracking of the Elbow
  3839. FIGURE 18.3 Mobilization with movement (MWM) to improve elbow flexion. A lateral glide is applied to the proximal ulna while the patient actively flexes, followed by a passive end-range stretch.
  3840. Improve Muscle Performance and Functional Abilities
  3841. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Return to Function Phase
  3842. Improve Muscle Performance
  3843. Restore Functional Mobility of Joints and Soft Tissues
  3844. Promote Joint Protection
  3845. Joint Surgery and Postoperative Management
  3846. BOX 18.3 Surgical Options for Displaced Fractures of the Radial Head
  3847. Radial Head Excision or Arthroplasty
  3848. Indications for Surgery
  3849. Procedure
  3850. Background
  3851. Selection of procedure.
  3852. Implant designs, materials, and fixation.
  3853. TABLE 18.2 Severity of Elbow Joint Disease and Selection of Surgical Procedure
  3854. Overview of Operative Procedure
  3855. Complications
  3856. Intraoperative complications.
  3857. Postoperative complications.
  3858. Postoperative Management
  3859. Immobilization
  3860. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  3861. Goals and interventions.
  3862. CLINICAL TIP
  3863. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  3864. Goals and interventions.
  3865. Resumption of recreational and work-related activities.
  3866. Outcomes
  3867. Total Elbow Arthroplasty
  3868. Indications for Surgery
  3869. Procedure
  3870. Background
  3871. Implant design and selection considerations.
  3872. BOX 18.4 Contraindications to Total Elbow Arthroplasty
  3873. FIGURE 18.4 (A) Anteroposterior and (B) lateral radiographs following placement of a Conrad-Morrey (linked/semiconstrained) total elbow arthroplasty.
  3874. FIGURE 18.5 A linked, semiconstrained design is characterized by varus-valgus and axial rotation tolerances of several degrees at the articulation.
  3875. Materials and fixation.
  3876. Operative Overview
  3877. Complications
  3878. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3879. Intraoperative complications.
  3880. Postoperative complications.
  3881. BOX 18.5 Analysis of Three Potential Complications after Total Elbow Arthroplasty
  3882. Postoperative Management
  3883. Immobilization
  3884. Position.
  3885. Duration.
  3886. Exercise Progression
  3887. TABLE 18.3 Factors That Influence the Progression of Exercise After Total Elbow Arthroplasty
  3888. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  3889. CLINICAL TIP
  3890. Goals and interventions.
  3891. BOX 18.6 Specific Precautions After Total Elbow Arthroplasty
  3892. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  3893. Goals and interventions.
  3894. Outcomes
  3895. Pain relief and patient satisfaction.
  3896. ROM and functional use of the upper extremity.
  3897. TEA survival rates.
  3898. Myositis Ossificans
  3899. Etiology of Symptoms
  3900. Management
  3901. Overuse Syndromes: Repetitive Trauma Syndromes
  3902. Related Pathologies
  3903. Lateral Elbow Tendinopathy (Tennis Elbow)
  3904. Medial Elbow Tendinopathy (Golfer’s Elbow)
  3905. Etiology of Symptoms
  3906. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  3907. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  3908. Nonoperative Management of Overuse Syndromes: Protection Phase
  3909. Decrease Pain, Inflammation, Edema, or Spasm
  3910. Develop Soft Tissue and Joint Mobility
  3911. Maintain Upper Extremity Function
  3912. Nonoperative Management: Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  3913. Increase Muscle Flexibility and Scar Mobility
  3914. Restore Joint Tracking at the RU Joint
  3915. FIGURE 18.6 MWM for lateral epicondylitis. Lateral glide is applied to the proximal forearm (A) with resistance added to wrist extension, (B) with patient squeezing a ball to bring in the wrist extensors, and (C) with self-treatment.
  3916. Improve Muscle Performance and Function
  3917. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3918. Patient Education
  3919. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3920. Exercise Interventions for the Elbow and Forearm
  3921. Exercise Techniques to Increase Flexibility and Range of Motion
  3922. Manual, Mechanical, and Self-Stretching Techniques
  3923. To Increase Elbow Extension
  3924. CLINICAL TIP
  3925. Mechanical Stretch: Mild Flexion Contracture
  3926. Self-Stretch: Mild Flexion Contracture
  3927. Mechanical Stretch: Dynamic Splinting
  3928. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  3929. Manual Stretch: Biceps Brachii
  3930. Mechanical Stretch: Biceps Brachii
  3931. Self-Stretch: Biceps Brachii
  3932. FIGURE 18.7 Self-stretching the biceps brachii musculotendinous unit includes stretching the long head across the shoulder joint (A) supine and (B) standing.
  3933. To Increase Elbow Flexion
  3934. Self-Stretch: Mild Extension Contracture
  3935. Self-Stretch: Long Head of Triceps
  3936. FIGURE 18.8 Self-stretching the triceps brachii musculotendinous unit includes stretching the long head across the shoulder joint.
  3937. To Increase Forearm Pronation and Supination
  3938. Self-Stretch to Increase Pronation
  3939. Self-Stretch to Increase Supination
  3940. FIGURE 18.9 Self-stretching the forearm into supination. It is important that the stretch force is against the radius, not the hand.
  3941. Self-Stretching Techniques: Muscles of the Medial and Lateral Epicondyles
  3942. To Stretch the Wrist Extensor Muscles (From the Lateral Epicondyle)
  3943. FIGURE 18.10 Self-stretching of the muscles of the lateral epicondyle.
  3944. To Stretch the Wrist Flexor Muscles (from the Medial Epicondyle)
  3945. Exercises to Develop and Improve Muscle Performance and Functional Control
  3946. Isometric Exercises
  3947. Multiple-Angle Isometric Exercises
  3948. Angle-Specific Training
  3949. Alternating Isometrics and Rhythmic Stabilization
  3950. Open-Chain Exercises
  3951. Closed-Chain Exercises
  3952. Dynamic Strengthening and Endurance Exercises
  3953. Elbow Flexion
  3954. FIGURE 18.11 Resisting elbow flexion with emphasis on the biceps brachii. The shoulder extends as the elbow flexes with the forearm in supination. This combined action lengthens the proximal portion of the musculotendinous unit across the shoulder while it contracts to move the elbow, thus maintaining a more optimal length-tension relationship through a greater ROM.
  3955. Elbow Extension
  3956. Long Head of Triceps with Elbow Extension
  3957. FIGURE 18.12 Resisting elbow extension, beginning with the long head of the triceps brachii on a stretch.
  3958. Pronation and Supination
  3959. FIGURE 18.13 Mechanical resistance exercise using a small bar with an asymmetrically placed weight for strengthening (A) forearm pronators and (B) supinators. The bar also can be rotated through a downward arc to affect the other half of the range for each muscle by placing the weight on the ulnar side of the hand.
  3960. Wrist Flexion and Extension
  3961. FIGURE 18.14 Resisted wrist extension to strengthen muscles of the lateral epicondyle without the use of grasp.
  3962. FIGURE 18.15 Strengthening the muscles of the lateral epicondyle (wrist extensors) while grasping a handheld weight for resistance.
  3963. FIGURE 18.16 Wrist roller exercise to strengthen grip and develop muscles of the lateral epicondyle. This exercise requires stabilization in the shoulder girdle and elbow muscles. The elbows may be flexed or the forearms supinated to emphasize the elbow flexors or muscles of the medial epicondyle, respectively.
  3964. Functional Progression for the Elbow and Forearm
  3965. Diagonal Patterns
  3966. PNF patterns against manual or mechanical resistance.
  3967. Combined Pulling Motions
  3968. FIGURE 18.17 Bilateral pull-up against elastic resistance.
  3969. FIGURE 18.18 Closed-chain, modified chin-up using top half of body weight for resistance to strengthen the elbow flexors. This exercise may be performed in a bed with an overhead trapeze.
  3970. FIGURE 18.19 Simulation of a “lawn mower pull” for functional strengthening of the upper extremity.
  3971. Combined Pushing Motions
  3972. FIGURE 18.20 Closed-chain strengthening of the triceps. (A) Modified push-up. (B) Seated push-up.
  3973. FIGURE 18.21 Strengthening the triceps with pushing activities. (A) Pushing weighted objects across a table. (B) Depressing a door handle and pushing open a door.
  3974. Plyometric Training (Stretch-Shortening Drills)
  3975. Simulated Functional Tasks and Activities
  3976. FIGURE 18.22 Mechanical resistance exercise using wall pulleys to simulate tennis swings. (A) Backhand stroke. (B) Forehand stroke. (C) Serve.
  3977. Independent Learning Activities
  3978. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  3979. Laboratory Practice
  3980. Case Studies
  3981. REFERENCES
  3982. CHAPTER 19 The Wrist and Hand
  3983. Structure and Function of the Wrist and Hand
  3984. FIGURE 19.1 Bones of the wrist and hand complex.
  3985. Joints of the Wrist and Hand
  3986. Wrist Joint: Characteristics and Arthrokinematics
  3987. Radiocarpal Joint
  3988. Characteristics.
  3989. Arthrokinematics.
  3990. Midcarpal Joint
  3991. Characteristics.
  3992. Arthrokinematics.
  3993. Hand Joints: Characteristics and Arthrokinematics
  3994. Carpometacarpal Joints of Digits 2 through 5
  3995. Characteristics.
  3996. Arthrokinematics.
  3997. BOX 19.1 Arthrokinematics of the Wrist and Hand Joints
  3998. Carpometacarpal Joint of the Thumb (Digit 1)
  3999. Characteristics.
  4000. Arthrokinematics.
  4001. Metacarpophalangeal Joints of Digits 2–5
  4002. Characteristics.
  4003. Arthrokinematics.
  4004. Interphalangeal Joints and MCP Joint of the Thumb
  4005. Characteristics.
  4006. Arthrokinematics.
  4007. Hand Function
  4008. Muscles of the Wrist and Hand
  4009. TABLE 19.1 Muscles of the Wrist and Hand
  4010. FIGURE 19.2 The extrinsic and intrinsic muscles of the wrist and hand create a balance of forces that affect hand function.
  4011. Length-Tension Relationships
  4012. Extensor Mechanism
  4013. FIGURE 19.3 Anatomical structures of the extensor mechanism: (A) lateral view and (B) dorsal view. See text for description of functional relationships.
  4014. Control of the Unloaded (Free) Hand
  4015. Grips and Prehension Patterns
  4016. Power Grips
  4017. Description.
  4018. Muscle control.
  4019. Precision Patterns
  4020. Description.
  4021. Muscle control.
  4022. Combined Grips
  4023. Description.
  4024. Pinch.
  4025. Major Nerves Subject to Pressure and Trauma at the Wrist and Hand
  4026. Nerve Disorders in the Wrist
  4027. Median nerve.
  4028. Ulnar nerve.
  4029. Referred Pain and Sensory Patterns
  4030. Management of Wrist and Hand Disorders and Surgeries
  4031. Joint Hypomobility: Nonoperative Management
  4032. Common Joint Pathologies and Associated Impairments
  4033. Rheumatoid Arthritis
  4034. Acute stage.
  4035. TABLE 19.2 Wrist and Hand Pathologies/Surgical Procedures and Preferred Practice Patterns
  4036. Advanced stages.
  4037. FIGURE 19.4 Joint deformities seen in the hand of a patient with rheumatoid arthritis. Note the hypertrophy of the IP joints, rheumatoid nodules, and volar subluxation of the triquetrum. This patient had fusion of the wrist joints due to pain and complete destruction of the joints, which has helped prevent the deforming, bowstringing effect of the extrinsic tendons on the MCP joints.
  4038. FIGURE 19.5 (A) Swan-neck and (B) Boutonnière deformities. See text for description of the pathomechanics.
  4039. Degenerative Joint Disease/Osteoarthritis and Posttraumatic Arthrosis
  4040. FIGURE 19.6 Advanced-stage osteoarthritis of the hands of an 86-year-old pianist. Note the carpometacarpal (CMC) joint subluxation at the base of each thumb. Atrophy of the first dorsal interossei, nodules, and joint enlargements are apparent, but the individual is still functional.
  4041. Postimmobilization Hypomobility
  4042. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  4043. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Protection Phase
  4044. Control Pain and Protect Joints
  4045. Patient education.
  4046. Pain management.
  4047. Splinting.
  4048. Activity modification.
  4049. Maintain Joint and Tendon Mobility and Muscle Integrity
  4050. Passive, assistive, or active ROM.
  4051. Tendon-gliding exercises.
  4052. Multiple-angle muscle setting exercises.
  4053. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  4054. BOX 19.2 Joint Protection in the Wrist and Hand
  4055. Increase Joint Play and Accessory Motions
  4056. Joint mobilization techniques.
  4057. Unlock a subluxated ulnomeniscal-triquetral joint.
  4058. FIGURE 19.7 Self-mobilization of the ulnomeniscal-triquetral (UMI) joint.
  4059. Improve Joint Tracking and Pain-Free Motion
  4060. MWM of the wrist.
  4061. FIGURE 19.8 Mobilization with movement (MWM) to increase wrist flexion or extension. Apply a lateral glide while the patient actively flexes or extends the wrist and then applies a passive stretch force with his other hand at the end of the range.
  4062. MWM of the MCP and IP joints of the digits.
  4063. Improve Mobility, Strength, and Function
  4064. CLINICAL TIP
  4065. Neuromuscular control and strength.
  4066. Functional activities.
  4067. Conditioning exercises.
  4068. Joint protection.
  4069. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4070. Joint Surgery and Postoperative Management
  4071. BOX 19.3 Surgical Intervention for RA or DJD of the Wrist and Hand
  4072. General goals.
  4073. Wrist Arthroplasty
  4074. Indications for Surgery
  4075. Procedures
  4076. Implant Design, Materials, and Fixation
  4077. BOX 19.4 Contraindications to Arthroplasty of the Wrist or Digits
  4078. FIGURE 19.9 Total wrist arthroplasty.
  4079. Operative Overview
  4080. Postoperative Management
  4081. Immobilization
  4082. Exercise Progression
  4083. CLINICAL TIP
  4084. Exercise: Maximum and Moderate Protection Phases
  4085. Goals and interventions.
  4086. BOX 19.5 Precautions After Wrist Arthroplasty
  4087. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4088. Goals and interventions.
  4089. Outcomes
  4090. Pain relief.
  4091. Wrist and forearm ROM, strength, and function.
  4092. Complications.
  4093. Metacarpophalangeal Implant Arthroplasty
  4094. Indications for Surgery
  4095. Procedures
  4096. Implant Design, Materials, and Fixation
  4097. FIGURE 19.10 Lateral view of the three most common silicone-based implants: Neuflex (top), Avanta (middle), Swanson (bottom). Note that the Avanta and Swanson implants are of a 0° bend type.
  4098. Operative Overview
  4099. Postoperative Management
  4100. Immobilization
  4101. Dynamic splinting.
  4102. FIGURE 19.11 A dynamic extension splint with rubber bands attached to a dorsal outrigger used after MCP arthroplasty, permits active MCP flexion, and at rest, maintains the MCP joints in extension and sometimes slight radial deviation.
  4103. Static splinting.
  4104. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4105. Exercise Progression
  4106. CLINICAL TIP
  4107. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4108. CLINICAL TIP
  4109. Goals and interventions.
  4110. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  4111. Goals and interventions.
  4112. Outcomes
  4113. Pain relief and patient satisfaction.
  4114. ROM and hand function.
  4115. Complications.
  4116. Proximal Interphalangeal Implant Arthroplasty
  4117. Indications for Surgery
  4118. Procedure
  4119. Implant Design, Materials, and Fixation
  4120. Operative Overview
  4121. CLINICAL TIP
  4122. TABLE 19.3 Comparison of Surgical Approaches for PIP Joint Arthroplasty
  4123. Postoperative Management
  4124. Immobilization
  4125. Exercise Progression
  4126. TABLE 19.4 Position of Immobilization After PIP Arthroplasty
  4127. Exercise: Maximum and Moderate Protection Phases
  4128. CLINICAL TIP
  4129. Goals and interventions.
  4130. BOX 19.6 Postoperative Guidelines and Precautions after Correction of a Boutonnière Deformity
  4131. BOX 19.7 Postoperative Guidelines and Precautions after Correction of a Swan-Neck Deformity
  4132. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4133. Outcomes
  4134. Complications.
  4135. Carpometacarpal Arthroplasty of the Thumb
  4136. Indications for Surgery
  4137. Procedures
  4138. Background and Surgical Options
  4139. Operative Overview
  4140. Tendon interposition arthroplasty.
  4141. Surface replacement arthroplasty.
  4142. Postoperative Management
  4143. Immobilization
  4144. Exercise Progression
  4145. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4146. Goals and interventions.
  4147. BOX 19.8 Precautions after CMC Arthroplasty of the Thumb
  4148. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  4149. Goals and interventions.
  4150. Outcomes
  4151. Pain relief and patient satisfaction.
  4152. ROM and hand function.
  4153. Complications.
  4154. Tendon Rupture Associated with RA: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4155. Background and Indications for Surgery
  4156. Procedures
  4157. Postoperative Management
  4158. Immobilization
  4159. CLINICAL TIP
  4160. Exercise Progression
  4161. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4162. BOX 19.9 Precautions after Extensor Tendon Transfers or Reconstruction in the Rheumatoid Hand
  4163. Goals and interventions.
  4164. CLINICAL TIP
  4165. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  4166. Goals and interventions.
  4167. Outcomes
  4168. Repetitive Trauma Syndromes/Overuse Syndromes
  4169. Tendinopathy
  4170. Etiology of Symptoms
  4171. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  4172. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  4173. Management: Protection Phase
  4174. Management: Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  4175. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4176. Traumatic Lesions of the Wrist and Hand
  4177. Simple Sprain: Nonoperative Management
  4178. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  4179. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  4180. Management
  4181. Lacerated Flexor Tendons of the Hand: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4182. Background and Indications for Surgery
  4183. FIGURE 19.12 Flexor tendon zones; volar aspect of the hand and wrist.
  4184. BOX 19.10 Flexor Tendon Zones: Anatomical Landmarks
  4185. Procedures
  4186. Types and Timing of Operative Procedures
  4187. Types of repair or reconstruction.
  4188. BOX 19.11 Consequences of Injury to the Volar Surface of the Hand, Wrist, and Forearm
  4189. Timing of a repair.
  4190. Operative Overview
  4191. Surgical approach.
  4192. Suturing technique.
  4193. CLINICAL TIP
  4194. Closure.
  4195. Postoperative Management
  4196. General considerations.
  4197. BOX 19.12 Factors that Contribute to Adhesion Formation After Tendon Injury and Repair
  4198. Approaches to postoperative management.
  4199. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4200. BOX 19.13 Rationale for Early Controlled Motion After Tendon Repair
  4201. BOX 19.14 Indications for Use of Prolonged Immobilization and Delayed Motion After Flexor Tendon Repair
  4202. Immobilization
  4203. Duration of immobilization.
  4204. Type or method of immobilization.
  4205. Position of immobilization.
  4206. FIGURE 19.13 A dorsal-blocking splint with dynamic traction for early controlled motion after flexor tendon repair.
  4207. Exercise: Early Controlled Motion Approaches
  4208. BOX 19.15 Static and Dynamic Dorsal Blocking Splints: Position and Use
  4209. Early controlled passive motion.
  4210. Early controlled active motion.
  4211. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4212. BOX 19.16 A Sequence of Exercises for Early Active Motion with Progressive Tendon Loading after Flexor Tendon Repair57
  4213. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4214. FIGURE 19.14 Splinting and exercise for early active motion post-flexor tendon repair. (A) Following removal of the surgical compression dressing and fabrication of a static dorsal-blocking splint, a tenodesis splint with a wrist hinge is fabricated. (B) The tenodesis splint allows full wrist flexion but limits wrist extension to 30°. During early movement of the fingers, the MCP joints are maintained in at least 60° of flexion, as the IP joints are passively moved and placed in composite flexion. (C) Then the patient actively extends the wrist while maintaining the flexed finger position with a static muscle contraction and the least amount of tension possible in the finger flexors.
  4215. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4216. Exercise: Moderate Protection Phase
  4217. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4218. Exercise: Delayed Motion Approach
  4219. Outcomes
  4220. Functional outcomes.
  4221. Complications.
  4222. Lacerated Extensor Tendons of the Hand: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4223. Background and Indications for Surgery
  4224. FIGURE 19.15 Extensor tendon zones; dorsal aspect of the hand and wrist.
  4225. BOX 19.17 Extensor Tendon Zones: Anatomic Landmarks
  4226. Procedures
  4227. Types of Repairs and Reconstruction
  4228. Operative Overview
  4229. BOX 19.18 Consequences of Injury to the Dorsal Structures of the Hand and Wrist
  4230. Zone III/IV primary repair.
  4231. Postoperative Management
  4232. General considerations.
  4233. Approaches to postoperative management.
  4234. Immobilization
  4235. Duration of immobilization.
  4236. Types of immobilization.
  4237. Exercise: Early Controlled Active Motion Approach
  4238. CLINICAL TIP
  4239. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4240. Use of customized static volar splints.
  4241. FIGURE 19.16 One of two static volar template splints used during early short-arc exercises of the PIP and DIP joints after repair of the extensor mechanism in zones III/IV. During exercise, the patient actively holds the wrist in approximately 30° of flexion and manually holds the MCP joint in neutral to slight flexion. (A) Using minimal active tension during combined active PIP and DIP flexion, the splint initially limits PIP and DIP flexion to 30° and 20° to 25°, respectively, to prevent excessive stretch of the repair site. (B) The patient actively and slowly extends the PIP and DIP joints to full extension and briefly holds the extended position.
  4242. Exercise progression.
  4243. Exercise: Delayed Mobilization Approach
  4244. BOX 19.19 Special Considerations for Exercise After Extensor Tendon Repair and Extended Immobilization
  4245. Outcomes
  4246. Exercise Interventions for the Wrist and Hand
  4247. Techniques for Musculotendinous Mobility
  4248. Tendon-Gliding and Tendon-Blocking Exercises
  4249. Place-and-Hold Exercises
  4250. Flexor Tendon-Gliding Exercises
  4251. FIGURE 19.17 The five finger positions used for flexor tendon-gliding exercises: (A) straight hand, (B) hook fist (claw fist), (C) full fist, (D) table top (intrinsic plus), and (E) straight fist.
  4252. Hook (Claw) Fist Position
  4253. Full Fist
  4254. Straight Fist (Sublimis Fist)
  4255. Thumb Flexion
  4256. Flexor Tendon-Blocking Exercises
  4257. Isolated MCP Flexion (Lumbricals and Palmar Interossei)
  4258. PIP Flexion (Flexor Digitorum Superficialis)
  4259. DIP Flexion (Flexor Digitorum Profundus)
  4260. Full Fist
  4261. FIGURE 19.18 Flexor tendon blocking exercises: (A) isolated MCP flexion of one digit, (B) isolated PIP flexion (flexor digitorum superficialis) of one digit, and (C) isolated DIP flexion (flexor digitorum profundus) of one digit.
  4262. Exercises to Reduce an Extensor Lag
  4263. Isolated MCP Extension
  4264. Isolated PIP and DIP Extension
  4265. Terminal-Range Extension of IP Joints
  4266. FIGURE 19.19 Terminal extension of the PIP joint. The MCP joint is stabilized in extension, and the patient lifts the middle and distal phalanges off the table.
  4267. Extensor Tendon-Gliding Exercises
  4268. FIGURE 19.20 Differential gliding of the extensor digitorum tendons. Move each digit into flexion while stabilizing the other digits in extension.
  4269. Scar Tissue Mobilization for Tendon Adhesions
  4270. To Mobilize the Long Finger Flexor Tendons
  4271. To Mobilize the Extensor Tendons and the Extensor Mechanism
  4272. Exercise Techniques to Increase Flexibility and Range of Motion
  4273. General Stretching Techniques
  4274. To Increase Wrist Extension
  4275. To Increase Wrist Flexion
  4276. To Increase Flexion or Extension of Individual Joints of the Fingers or Thumb
  4277. Stretching Techniques for the Intrinsic and Multijoint Muscles
  4278. Self-Stretching the Lumbricals and Interossei Muscles
  4279. FIGURE 19.21 Self-stretching (A) the lumbricals with MCP extension and IP flexion and (B) the adductor pollicis with CMC abduction of the thumb. To increase thumb abduction, it is critical the stretch force is applied against the metacarpal head, not the proximal or distal phalanges.
  4280. Self-Stretching the Interossei Muscles
  4281. Self-Stretching the Adductor Pollicis
  4282. Manual Stretching of the Extrinsic Muscles
  4283. Self-Stretching the Flexor Digitorum Profundus and Superficialis
  4284. FIGURE 19.22 Self-stretching of the extrinsic finger flexor muscles, showing stabilization of the small distal joints. To isolate stretch to the wrist flexors, allow the fingers to flex over the edge of the table.
  4285. Self-Stretching the Extensor Digitorum Communis
  4286. Exercises to Develop and Improve Muscle Performance, Neuromuscular Control, and Coordinated Movement
  4287. Techniques to Strengthen Muscles of the Wrist and Hand
  4288. To Strengthen Wrist Musculature
  4289. Wrist Flexion (Flexor Carpi Ulnaris and Radialis) and Extension (Extensor Carpi Radialis Longus and Brevis and Extensor Carpi Ulnaris)
  4290. FIGURE 19.23 Mechanical resistance to strengthen wrist extension. Note that the forearm is pronated. To resist wrist flexion, the forearm is supinated.
  4291. Wrist Radial Deviation (Flexor and Extensor Carpi Radialis Muscles and Abductor Pollicis Longus) and Ulnar Deviation (Flexor and Extensor Carpi Ulnaris Muscles)
  4292. FIGURE 19.24 Mechanical resistance to strengthen (A) radial deviation and (B) ulnar deviation of the wrist using a weighted bar.
  4293. Functional Progression for the Wrist
  4294. CLINICAL TIP
  4295. To Strengthen Weak Intrinsic Musculature
  4296. MCP Joint Flexion with IP Joint Extension (Lumbricals)
  4297. FIGURE 19.25 To strengthen intrinsic muscle function for combined MCP flexion and IP extension, the patient begins with (A) MCP extension and IP flexion and (B) pushes his fingertips outward. The same motion is resisted by (C) pushing the fingertips against the palm of the other hand.
  4298. Isolated or Combined Abduction/Adduction of Each Finger (Dorsal and Volar Interossei)
  4299. Abduction of the Thumb (Abductor Pollicis Brevis and Longus)
  4300. Opposition of the Thumb (Opponens Pollicis)
  4301. To Strengthen Weak Extrinsic Muscles of the Fingers
  4302. Metacarpophalangeal Extension (Extensor Digitorum Communis, Indicis, and Digiti Minimi)
  4303. Interphalangeal Flexion (Flexor Digitorum Profundus and Superficialis)
  4304. FIGURE 19.26 Self-resistance to strengthen extrinsic finger flexor muscles.
  4305. Mechanical Resistance Techniques for Combined Intrinsic and Extrinsic Muscle Function
  4306. Towel or Newspaper Crumple
  4307. Disk Weight Resistance
  4308. Other Resistance Aids
  4309. Dexterity and Functional Activities
  4310. Fine-Finger Dexterity
  4311. Functional Activities
  4312. Independent Learning Activities
  4313. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  4314. Laboratory Practice
  4315. Case Studies
  4316. REFERENCES
  4317. CHAPTER 20 The Hip
  4318. Structure and Function of the Hip
  4319. FIGURE 20.1 Bones and joints of the pelvis and hip.
  4320. Anatomical Characteristics of the Hip Region
  4321. Boney Structures
  4322. The Pelvis
  4323. The Femur
  4324. Hip Joint Characteristics and Arthrokinematics
  4325. Characteristics
  4326. Articular Surfaces
  4327. Ligaments
  4328. FIGURE 20.2 Ligaments supporting the hip joint. (A) Anterior view. (B) Posterior view.
  4329. Arthrokinematics of the Hip Joint
  4330. Motions of the femur.
  4331. BOX 20.1 Summary of Arthrokinematics of the Femoral Head in the Hip Joint
  4332. Motions of the pelvis.
  4333. Influence of the Hip Joint on Balance and Posture Control
  4334. Functional Relationships in the Hip Region
  4335. Motions of the Femur and Muscle Function
  4336. Motions of the Pelvis and Muscle Function
  4337. TABLE 20.1 Muscles of the Hip: Open-Chain (Nonweight-Bearing) Function
  4338. FIGURE 20.3 (A) Neutral position of the pelvis. (B) Anterior pelvic tilt. (C) Posterior pelvic tilt. With anterior pelvic tilt, the decreased angle between the pelvis and femur results in hip flexion, and with posterior pelvic tilt, the increased angle results in hip extension.
  4339. Anterior Pelvic Tilt
  4340. Posterior Pelvic Tilt
  4341. Pelvic Shifting
  4342. Lateral Pelvic Tilt
  4343. Pelvic Rotation
  4344. FIGURE 20.4 (A) Lateral pelvic tilt. Elevation of the iliac crest (hip liking) causes relative adduction of the hip on the elevated side, and lowering of the iliac crest (hip drop) causes relative abduction of the hip on the lower side. (B) Pelvic rotation. Forward motion (forward rotation) of the pelvis causes relative external rotation of the hip; and backward motion (posterior rotation) of the pelvis causes relative internal rotation of the hip.
  4345. Pelvifemoral Motion
  4346. Hip, Knee, and Ankle Functional Relationships in Weight Bearing
  4347. Hip flexion/extension.
  4348. Hip abduction/adduction.
  4349. Hip rotation.
  4350. Pathomechanics in the Hip Region
  4351. Decreased Flexibility
  4352. Muscle Weakness
  4353. Patellofemoral impairment.
  4354. Anterior cruciate ligament strain.
  4355. Piriformis syndrome.
  4356. Hip Muscle Imbalances and Their Effects
  4357. BOX 20.2 Hip Muscle Imbalances Related to Postural Impairments
  4358. Shortened tensor fasciae latae (TFL) and/or gluteus maximus.
  4359. Dominance of the TFL over the gluteus medius.
  4360. Dominance of the two-joint hip flexor muscles over the iliopsoas.
  4361. Dominance of hamstring muscles over the gluteus maximus.
  4362. Use of lateral trunk muscles for hip abductors.
  4363. Asymmetrical Leg Length
  4364. Unilateral short leg.
  4365. Coxa valga and coxa vara.
  4366. Anteversion and retroversion.
  4367. The Hip and Gait
  4368. Hip Muscle Function and Gait
  4369. Hip Flexors
  4370. Hip Extensors
  4371. Hip Abductors
  4372. Effect of Musculoskeletal Impairments on Gait
  4373. Referred Pain and Nerve Injury
  4374. Major Nerves Subject to Injury or Entrapment
  4375. Sciatic nerve.
  4376. Obturator nerve.
  4377. Femoral nerve.
  4378. Common Sources of Referred Pain in the Hip and Buttocks Region
  4379. Management of Hip Disorders and Surgeries
  4380. Joint Hypomobility: Nonoperative Management
  4381. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  4382. TABLE 20.2 Hip Pathologies and Related Preferred Practice Patterns
  4383. Osteoarthritis (Degenerative Joint Disease)
  4384. Postimmobilization Hypomobility
  4385. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  4386. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4387. BOX 20.3 Clinical Prediction Rule for the Diagnosis of Osteoarthritis of the Hip139
  4388. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  4389. Early stages.
  4390. Progressive degeneration.
  4391. CLINICAL TIP
  4392. Management: Protection Phase
  4393. Provide Patient Education
  4394. Decrease Pain at Rest
  4395. Decrease Pain During Weight-Bearing Activities
  4396. Decrease Effects of Stiffness and Maintain Available Motion
  4397. Management: Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  4398. Progressively Increase Joint Play and Soft Tissue Mobility
  4399. Joint mobilization techniques.31
  4400. Stretching techniques.
  4401. Improve Joint Tracking and Pain-Free Motion
  4402. Increase Internal Rotation
  4403. Increase Flexion
  4404. FIGURE 20.5 Mobilization with movement using an inferolateral glide increasing (A) pain-free internal rotation, (B) pain-free flexion, (C) pain-free extension, and (D) extension during weight bearing.
  4405. Increase Extension
  4406. Increase Extension During Weight Bearing
  4407. Improve Muscle Performance in Supporting Muscles, Balance, and Aerobic Capacity
  4408. Provide Patient Education
  4409. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4410. Joint Surgery and Postoperative Management
  4411. Total Hip Arthroplasty
  4412. FIGURE 20.6 Total hip arthroplasty. (A) The preoperative film of a severely degenerative hip joint demonstrates the classic signs of degenerative joint disease. A, N; B arrowed, joint space with superior migration of the femoral head; B, osteophyte formation at the joint margins of both the acetabulum and femoral head; C, sclerosis of subchondral bone on both sides of the joint surface; D, acetabular protrusion (a boney outpouching of the acetabular cup in response to the progressive superior and medial migration of the femoral head). (B) Postoperative film shows a total hip arthroplasty. Both the acetabular and femoral portions of the joint have been resected and replaced with prosthetic components.
  4413. Indications for Surgery
  4414. BOX 20.4 Contraindications to Total Hip Arthroplasty
  4415. Preoperative Management
  4416. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4417. BOX 20.5 Components of Therapy-Related Preoperative Management: Preparation for Total Hip Arthroplasty
  4418. Procedures
  4419. Background
  4420. Prosthetic designs and materials.
  4421. Cemented versus cementless fixation.
  4422. Operative Overview
  4423. Traditional surgical approaches.
  4424. TABLE 20.3 Features of Traditional (Conventional) Surgical Approaches for THA and Potential Impact on Postoperative Function
  4425. BOX 20.6 Features of Minimally Invasive Total Hip Arthroplasty
  4426. Minimally invasive approaches.
  4427. Implantation of components and closure.
  4428. CLINICAL TIP
  4429. Complications
  4430. Intraoperative complications.
  4431. Early postoperative complications.
  4432. Late complications.
  4433. Dislocation: a closer look.
  4434. Leg length inequality: a closer look.
  4435. Postoperative Management
  4436. Immobilization
  4437. Weight-Bearing Considerations
  4438. TABLE 20.4 Risk Factors Contributing to Joint Dislocation after Total Hip Arthroplasty
  4439. BOX 20.7 Early Postoperative Weight-Bearing Restrictions After Total Hip Arthroplasty
  4440. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4441. Exercise Progression and Functional Training
  4442. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4443. Accelerated Rehabilitation
  4444. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase After Traditional THA
  4445. Goals and interventions.
  4446. CLINICAL TIP
  4447. BOX 20.8 Early Postoperative Motion Precautions After Total Hip Arthroplasty*
  4448. Criteria to progress.
  4449. Exercise: Moderate Protection Phase After Traditional THA
  4450. Goals and interventions.
  4451. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4452. Criteria to progress.
  4453. Exercise: Minimum Protection Phase and Resumption of Full Activity
  4454. Extended rehabilitation and modification of activities.
  4455. CLINICAL TIP
  4456. Return to sport activities.
  4457. Outcomes
  4458. Pain relief, patient satisfaction, and quality of life.
  4459. Physical functioning.
  4460. TABLE 20.5 Guidelines for Participation in Sport, Recreational, and Fitness Activities Following THA69
  4461. Implant design, fixation, and surgical approach.
  4462. Impact of rehabilitation.
  4463. Hemiarthroplasty of the Hip
  4464. Indications for Surgery
  4465. Procedures
  4466. Background.
  4467. Operative procedure.
  4468. Postoperative Management
  4469. Outcomes
  4470. Hip Fractures: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4471. Hip Fracture: Incidence, Risk Factors, and Impact on Function
  4472. Sites and Types of Hip Fracture
  4473. FIGURE 20.7 Fractures of the proximal femur are broadly divided into intracapsular and extracapsular sites.
  4474. BOX 20.9 Common Sites and Types of Hip Fracture
  4475. Open Reduction and Internal Fixation of Hip Fracture
  4476. Indications for Surgery
  4477. FIGURE 20.8 Reduction and internal fixation of a complete fracture of the femoral neck. Restoration of alignment and good compression is obtained via fixation with three compression screws. The black arrows mark the extent of the fracture line.
  4478. FIGURE 20.9 Intertrochanteric fracture of the hip. This postoperative image shows fracture fixation via a side plate and screw combination device. The fracture line is evident, extending through the intertrochanteric region to the proximal femoral shaft. Some comminution is evident, and a large fragment on the medial shaft is noted. The imposed added densities of soft tissue are seen.
  4479. Procedures
  4480. Types of fixation and surgical approach.
  4481. Postoperative Management
  4482. Weight-Bearing Considerations
  4483. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4484. Exercise and Functional Training
  4485. BOX 20.10 Signs and Symptoms of Possible Failure of the Internal Fixation Mechanism
  4486. BOX 20.11 Special Considerations for Exercise and Gait After Internal Fixation of Fractures of the Proximal Femur
  4487. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4488. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4489. Goals and interventions.
  4490. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  4491. Extended exercise programs after surgery for hip fracture.
  4492. CLINICAL TIP
  4493. Goals and interventions.
  4494. TABLE 20.6 Summary of Studies of Extended Exercise Programs Following Surgery for Hip Fracture
  4495. Outcomes
  4496. General outcomes.
  4497. Impact of rehabilitation.
  4498. Painful Hip Syndromes: Nonoperative Management
  4499. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  4500. Musculotendinous Factors
  4501. Tendinopathies and muscle strains.
  4502. Repetitive trauma.
  4503. Bursitis
  4504. Trochanteric bursitis.
  4505. Psoas bursitis.
  4506. Ischiogluteal bursitis (Tailor’s or Weaver’s Bottom).
  4507. Femoroacetabular Impingement (FAI)
  4508. CLINICAL TIP
  4509. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  4510. Pain.
  4511. Gait deviations.
  4512. Imbalance in muscle flexibility and neuromuscular control.
  4513. Decreased muscular endurance.
  4514. Management: Protection Phase
  4515. Control Inflammation and Promote Healing
  4516. Develop Support in Related Areas
  4517. Management: Controlled Motion Phase
  4518. Develop a Strong Mobile Scar and Regain Flexibility
  4519. Develop a Balance in Length and Strength of the Hip Muscles
  4520. CLINICAL TIP
  4521. Develop Muscle and Cardiopulmonary Endurance
  4522. Patient Education
  4523. Management: Return to Function Phase
  4524. Exercise Interventions for the Hip Region
  4525. Exercise Techniques to Increase Flexibility and Range of Motion
  4526. Techniques to Stretch Range-Limiting Hip Structures
  4527. To Increase Hip Extension
  4528. Prone Press-Up
  4529. “Thomas Test” Stretch
  4530. FIGURE 20.10 Self-stretching to increase hip extension. The pelvis is stabilized by holding the opposite hip in flexion. The weight of the thigh provides a stretch force as the patient relaxes. Allowing the knee to extend emphasizes the one-joint hip flexors (iliopsoas), whereas maintaining the knee in flexion and hip neutral to rotation as the thigh is lowered emphasizes the two joint rectus femoris and tensor fasciae latae muscles.
  4531. Modified Fencer Stretch
  4532. Kneeling Fencer Stretch
  4533. FIGURE 20.11 Self-stretching of the hip flexor muscles and soft tissue anterior to the hip using a modified fencer’s squat posture.
  4534. To Increase Hip Flexion
  4535. Bilateral Knee to Chest Stretch
  4536. Unilateral Knee to Chest Stretch
  4537. Quadruped (All Fours) Stretch
  4538. Short-Sitting Stretch
  4539. FIGURE 20.12 Gluteus maximus self-stretch with lumbar spine stabilization. (A) The patient on all fours rocks into an anterior pelvic tilt, causing lumbar extension. (B) While maintaining lumbar extension, the patient shifts the buttocks back, attempting to sit on the heels. When lordosis can no longer be maintained, the end-range of hip flexion is reached; this position is held for the stretch.
  4540. To Increase Hip Abduction
  4541. FIGURE 20.13 Self-stretching of the adductor muscles with the hips at 90° of flexion.
  4542. To Increase Hip Abduction and External Rotation Simultaneously
  4543. FIGURE 20.14 Self-stretching to increase hip abduction and external rotation using the figure-4 position.
  4544. To Increase Hip Internal Rotation
  4545. FIGURE 20.15 Self-stretching to increase internal rotation of the hip.
  4546. Techniques to Stretch Range-Limiting, Two-Joint Muscles
  4547. Rectus Femoris Stretches
  4548. “Thomas Test” Stretch
  4549. Prone Stretch
  4550. Standing Stretch
  4551. FIGURE 20.16 Self-stretching of the rectus femoris while standing. The femur is kept in line with the trunk. Care must be taken to maintain a posterior PT and not arch or twist the back.
  4552. Hamstrings Stretches
  4553. Straight Leg Raising
  4554. Hamstrings Stretch in Doorway
  4555. FIGURE 20.17 Self-stretching of the hamstring muscles. Additional stretch can occur if the person either (A) moves the buttock closer to the door frame or (B) lifts the leg away from the doorframe.
  4556. Hamstrings Stretch on Chair or Table
  4557. Bilateral Toe Touching
  4558. FIGURE 20.18 Self-stretching the hamstring muscles by leaning the trunk toward the extended knee, flexing at the hips.
  4559. Tensor Fasciae Latae and Iliotibial Band Stretches
  4560. Supine Stretch
  4561. FIGURE 20.19 Self-stretching of the tensor fascia latae: supine. Pillows support the spine and pelvis, allowing the hips to extend. The crossed-over foot stabilizes the femur in adduction and external rotation.
  4562. Side-Lying Stretch
  4563. FIGURE 20.20 Self-stretching of the tensor fascia latae: side-lying. (A) The thigh is abducted in the plane of the body; then it is extended and externally rotated, then slowly lowered. Additional stretch occurs by flexing the knee. (B) Progress the intensity of a sustained stretch by pulling the hip into extension with a strap and adding a weight.
  4564. Standing Stretch
  4565. FIGURE 20.21 Self-stretching of the tensor fasciae latae: standing. The pelvis shifts toward the tight side with a slight side bend of the trunk away from the tight side. Increased stretch occurs when the extremity is positioned in external rotation prior to the stretch.
  4566. Exercises to Develop and Improve Muscle Performance and Functional Control
  4567. Open-Chain (Nonweight-Bearing) Exercises
  4568. To Develop Control and Strength of Hip Abduction (Gluteus Medius, Gluteus Minimus, and Tensor Fasciae Latae)
  4569. Supine Abduction
  4570. Side-Lying Abduction
  4571. Standing Abduction
  4572. To Develop Control and Strength of Hip Extension (Gluteus Maximus)
  4573. Gluteal Muscle Setting
  4574. Standing Leg Lifts with Trunk Support
  4575. CLINICAL TIP
  4576. Quadruped Leg Lifts
  4577. FIGURE 20.22 Isolated training and strengthening of the gluteus maximus. Starting in the quadruped position, extend the hip while keeping the knee flexed to rule out use of the hamstring muscles. Do not to extend the hip beyond the available ROM to avoid causing stress to the sacroiliac or lumbar spinal joints.
  4578. CLINICAL TIP
  4579. Standing Extension
  4580. To Develop Control and Strength of Hip External Rotation
  4581. Prone External Rotation: Isometric
  4582. Side-Lying External Rotation: Clam Exercise
  4583. FIG. 20.23 Clam exercises to develop control and initiate antigravity strengthening of the external rotators. Wrap an exercise band around the thighs or add a weight to top leg to increase resistance.
  4584. Side-Lying External Rotation: Progression
  4585. Sitting: External Rotation
  4586. FIGURE 20.24 Strengthening the external rotators in a sitting position with elastic resistance.
  4587. To Develop Control and Strength of Hip Flexion (Iliopsoas and Rectus Femoris)
  4588. Supine Heel Slides
  4589. Standing: Hip and Knee Flexion
  4590. Standing: Straight-Leg Hip Flexion
  4591. To Develop Control and Strength of Hip Adduction
  4592. Side-Lying Adduction
  4593. Standing Adduction
  4594. Closed-Chain (Weight-Bearing) Exercises
  4595. FIGURE 20.25 Training and strengthening the hip adductors. (A) The top leg is stabilized by flexing the hip and resting the foot on the mat while the bottom leg is adducted against gravity. (B) The top leg is isometrically held in abduction while the bottom leg is adducted against gravity.
  4596. Closed-Chain Isometric Exercises
  4597. Alternating Isometrics and Rhythmic Stabilization
  4598. BOX 20.12 EMG Analysis of Selected Weight-Bearing Exercises used to Strengthen Lower Extremity Musculature*
  4599. Stabilization in Single-Leg Stance
  4600. FIGURE 20.26 Closed-chain stabilization and strengthening exercises with elastic resistance around the opposite leg. (A) Resisting extension on the right requires stabilization of the anterior muscles of the left side. (B) Resisting abduction on the right requires stabilization by the left frontal plane muscles. To increase difficulty, the resistance is moved distally onto the leg.
  4601. Closed-Chain Dynamic Exercises
  4602. Hip Hiking/Pelvic Drop
  4603. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4604. FIGURE 20.27 Training the hip abductor and hiker muscles for frontal plane strengthening and stability.
  4605. Bridging
  4606. FIGURE 20.28 Training and strengthening the hip extensor muscles using bridging exercises. Resistance can be added against the pelvis.
  4607. Wall Slides
  4608. FIGURE 20.29 Wall slides/partial squats to develop eccentric control of body weight. (A) The back sliding down a wall, superimposing bilateral arm motion for added resistance. (B) The back rolling a gym ball down the wall, superimposing antagonistic arm motion to develop coordination.
  4609. Partial Squats/Mini-Squats VIDEO 20.1
  4610. FIGURE 20.30 Elastic resistance around thighs is used to activate the hip external rotators and abductors while performing partial squats to develop strength of the hip and knee extensors.
  4611. Single-Limb Deadlift VIDEO 20.1
  4612. FIGURE 20.31 Single-limb deadlift to strengthen the hip extensors and develop control in the knee.
  4613. Step-Ups and Step-Downs
  4614. Partial and Full Lunges
  4615. FIGURE 20.32 Partial lunge with cane assistance to develop balance and control for lowering body weight.
  4616. Functional Progression for the Hip
  4617. BOX 20.13 Summary of Functional Progressions for the Hip
  4618. Independent Learning Activities
  4619. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  4620. Laboratory Practice
  4621. Case Studies
  4622. REFERENCES
  4623. CHAPTER 21 The Knee
  4624. Structure and Function of the Knee
  4625. FIGURE 21.1 Bones and joints of the knee and leg.
  4626. Joints of the Knee Complex
  4627. Tibiofemoral Joint
  4628. Characteristics.
  4629. FIGURE 21.2 The medial meniscus is attached to the medial collateral, anterior cruciate, and posterior cruciate ligaments. The lateral meniscus is also attached to the posterior cruciate ligament (the joint capsule has been removed for visualization).
  4630. Arthrokinematics.
  4631. Screw-home mechanism.
  4632. BOX 21.1 Summary of Arthrokinematics of the Knee Joint
  4633. Patellofemoral Joint
  4634. Characteristics.
  4635. Mechanics.
  4636. Patellar Function
  4637. Patellar Alignment
  4638. Forces Maintaining Alignment
  4639. Patellar Malalignment and Tracking Problems
  4640. FIGURE 21.3 The Q-angle is the angle formed by the intersection of a line drawn from the center of the patella to the anterosuperior iliac spine and a line drawn from the center of the patella to the tibial tuberosity. These two lines represent the bowstring effect on the patella from the pull of the quadriceps femoris muscle and the patellar tendon. An increased Q-angle is a factor contributing to excessive lateral tracking of the patella.
  4641. Increased Q-angle.
  4642. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4643. Muscle and fascial tightness.
  4644. Hip muscle weakness.
  4645. Lax medial capsular retinaculum or an insufficient VMO muscle.
  4646. Patellar Compression
  4647. Patellar contact.
  4648. Compression forces.
  4649. FIGURE 21.4 The extensor retinaculum is reinforced medially by the transversely oriented medial patellofemoral ligament and the longitudinally oriented medial patellotibial ligament. The lateral patellofemoral ligament and lateral patellotibial ligament help resist an excessive medial glide of the patella.
  4650. Muscle Function
  4651. Knee Extensor Muscle Function
  4652. Closed-chain function.
  4653. Patella.
  4654. Torque.
  4655. Knee Flexor Muscle Function
  4656. Dynamic Stability of the Knee
  4657. The Knee and Gait
  4658. Muscle Control of the Knee During Gait
  4659. Quadriceps.
  4660. Hamstrings.
  4661. Soleus.
  4662. Gastrocnemius.
  4663. Hip and Ankle Impairments
  4664. Hip flexion contractures.
  4665. Length/strength imbalances.
  4666. Foot impairments.
  4667. Referred Pain and Nerve Injuries
  4668. Major Nerves Subject to Injury at the Knee
  4669. Common Sources of Referred Pain
  4670. Management of Knee Disorders and Surgeries
  4671. Joint Hypomobility: Nonoperative Management
  4672. Common Joint Pathologies and Associated Impairments
  4673. Osteoarthritis (Degenerative Joint Disease)
  4674. TABLE 21.1 Knee Pathologies/Surgical Procedures and Preferred Practice Patterns
  4675. FIGURE 21.5 Advanced bilateral, medial compartment degenerative joint disease in the knees of a 52-year-old computer programmer/ analyst who subsequently underwent right total knee arthroplasty.
  4676. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4677. Rheumatoid Arthritis
  4678. Postimmobilization Hypomobility
  4679. Common Structural and Functional Impairments
  4680. Common Activity Limitations and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations and Disabilities)
  4681. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Protection Phase
  4682. Control Pain and Protect the Joint
  4683. Patient education.
  4684. Functional adaptations.
  4685. Maintain Soft Tissue and Joint Mobility
  4686. Passive, active-assistive, or active ROM.
  4687. Grade I or II joint distraction and anterior/posterior glides.
  4688. Maintain Muscle Function and Prevent Patellar Adhesions
  4689. Setting exercises.
  4690. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  4691. Educate the Patient
  4692. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4693. Decrease Pain from Mechanical Stress
  4694. Increase Joint Play and Range of Motion
  4695. Joint mobilization.
  4696. Stretching techniques.
  4697. Mobilization with movement.
  4698. MWM: Lateral or Medial Glides
  4699. MWM: Internal Tibial Rotation for Flexion—Manual Technique
  4700. FIGURE 21.6 MWM with internal tibial rotation to increase knee flexion.
  4701. MWM: Internal Rotation for Flexion—Self-Treatment
  4702. FIGURE 21.7 Self-treatment using MWM with internal tibial rotation to increase knee flexion.
  4703. Improve Muscle Performance in Supporting Muscles
  4704. Progressive strengthening.
  4705. Muscular endurance training.
  4706. Functional training.
  4707. Improve Cardiopulmonary Endurance
  4708. Outcomes
  4709. Joint Surgery and Postoperative Management
  4710. Repair of Articular Cartilage Defects
  4711. Indications for Surgery
  4712. CLINICAL TIP
  4713. Procedures
  4714. Microfracture.
  4715. Osteochondral autograft transplantation/mosaicplasty.
  4716. Autologous chondrocyte implantation.
  4717. Osteochondral allograft transplantation.
  4718. Other procedures.
  4719. BOX 21.2 Special Considerations and Precautions for Rehabilitation after Articular Cartilage Repair*
  4720. Postoperative Management
  4721. Total Knee Arthroplasty
  4722. Indications for Surgery
  4723. Procedure
  4724. Background
  4725. Types of knee arthroplasty.
  4726. BOX 21.3 Total Knee Arthroplasty: Design, Surgical Approach, Fixation
  4727. FIGURE 21.8 Posterior cruciate-retaining total knee arthroplasty of the right knee with cemented fixation. (A) Anteroposterior view. (B) Lateral view. Preoperative ROM is 0° to 125°; ROM 1 month after surgery is 0° to 120°.
  4728. Surgical approach.
  4729. Fixation.
  4730. Operative Overview
  4731. TABLE 21.2 Features of Standard and Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches for Total Knee Arthroplasty
  4732. Complications
  4733. Postoperative Management
  4734. TABLE 21.3 Total Knee Arthroplasty: Interventions for Each Phase of Rehabilitation
  4735. Immobilization and Early Motion
  4736. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4737. Weight-Bearing Considerations
  4738. Exercise Progression
  4739. BOX 21.4 Exercise Precautions Following TKA
  4740. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4741. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4742. Goals and interventions.
  4743. Criteria to progress.
  4744. Exercise: Moderate Protection/Controlled Motion Phase
  4745. Goals and interventions.
  4746. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4747. Criteria to progress.
  4748. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4749. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4750. Outcomes
  4751. Pain relief.
  4752. ROM.
  4753. Strength and endurance.
  4754. Physical function and activity level.
  4755. BOX 21.5 Recommendations for Participation in Physical Activities Following TKA
  4756. Patellofemoral Dysfunction: Nonoperative Management
  4757. Related Patellofemoral Pathologies
  4758. PF Instability
  4759. PF Pain with Malalignment or Biomechanical Dysfunction
  4760. CLINICAL TIP
  4761. PF Pain Without Malalignment
  4762. Soft tissue lesions.
  4763. Tight medial and lateral retinacula or patellar pressure syndrome.
  4764. Osteochondritis dissecans of the patella or femoral trochlea.
  4765. Traumatic patellar chondromalacia.
  4766. PF osteoarthritis.
  4767. Apophysitis.
  4768. Symptomatic bipartite patella.
  4769. Trauma.
  4770. Etiology of Symptoms
  4771. Consensus on Factors Leading to PF Symptoms
  4772. Local factors.
  4773. Distal factors.
  4774. Proximal factors.
  4775. Common Impairments, Activity Limitations, and Participation Restrictions
  4776. Structural and functional impairments.
  4777. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4778. FIGURE 21.9 Excessive hip adduction and internal rotation (valgus collapse at the knee) during descent from a step.
  4779. Activity limitations and participation restrictions.
  4780. Patellofemoral Symptoms: Management—Protection Phase
  4781. Patellofemoral Symptoms: Management—Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  4782. Patient Education
  4783. Instructions.
  4784. Home exercise program.
  4785. Increase Flexibility of Restricting Tissues
  4786. Patellar mobilization: medial glide.
  4787. Medial tipping of the patella.
  4788. FIGURE 21.10 Medial glide of the patella.
  4789. FIGURE 21.11 Medial tipping of the patella with friction massage along the lateral border.
  4790. Patellar taping.
  4791. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4792. Improve Muscle Performance and Neuromuscular Control
  4793. VMO Emphasis: A Closer Look
  4794. Nonweight-Bearing (Open-Chain) Exercises
  4795. Quadriceps setting (quad sets) in pain-free positions.
  4796. Quad sets with straight-leg raise.
  4797. Progression of resisted isometrics.
  4798. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4799. Short-arc terminal extension.
  4800. Weight-Bearing (Closed-Chain) Exercises
  4801. CLINICAL TIP
  4802. CLINICAL TIP
  4803. Functional Activities
  4804. Modify Biomechanical Stresses
  4805. Outcomes
  4806. Patellar Instability: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4807. Overview of Surgical Options
  4808. BOX 21.6 Surgical Options for Management of Lateral Patellar Instability and Associated Structural Impairments
  4809. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4810. Proximal Extensor Mechanism Realignment: Medial Patellofemoral Ligament Repair or Reconstruction and Related Procedures
  4811. Indications for Surgery
  4812. Procedures
  4813. Background and Operative Overview
  4814. MPFL repair or tightening.
  4815. MPFL reconstruction.
  4816. VMO imbrication (advancement).
  4817. Lateral retinacular release and other concomitant procedures.
  4818. Complications
  4819. Following proximal realignment.
  4820. Following LRR.
  4821. Postoperative Management
  4822. TABLE 21.4 MPFL Repair or Reconstruction: Intervention for Each Phase of Postoperative Rehabilitation
  4823. Immobilization and Weight-Bearing Considerations
  4824. Exercise Progression
  4825. BOX 21.7 Exercise Precautions After Proximal or Distal Realignment of the Extensor Mechanism
  4826. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4827. Goals and interventions.
  4828. Criteria to progress.
  4829. Exercise: Moderate Protection/Controlled Motion Phase
  4830. Goals and interventions.
  4831. Criteria to progress.
  4832. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4833. Goals and interventions.
  4834. Outcomes
  4835. Distal Realignment Procedures: Patellar Tendon with Tibial Tubercle Transfer and Related Procedures
  4836. Indications for Surgery
  4837. Procedures
  4838. Background and Operative Overview
  4839. Tibial tubercle transfer (Elmslie-Trillat procedure).
  4840. Anteriorization (elevation) of the tibial tubercle.
  4841. Distal medialization of the patellar tendon.
  4842. Complications
  4843. Postoperative Management
  4844. Immobilization and Weight-bearing Considerations
  4845. Exercise Progression
  4846. Outcomes
  4847. Ligament Injuries: Nonoperative Management
  4848. Mechanisms of Injury
  4849. Anterior Cruciate Ligament
  4850. FIGURE 21.12 Sagittal MRI demonstrating a complete midstructure tear of the anterior cruciate ligament (outlined).
  4851. FIGURE 21.13 The “terrible triad,” a combination of injuries to the medial meniscus (MM), medial collateral ligament (MCL), and anterior cruciate ligament (ACL). (A) Intact ligaments stretched by valgus force. (B) Rupture of the MCL, ACL, and MM.
  4852. Posterior Cruciate Ligament
  4853. FIGURE 21.14 Sagittal MRI demonstrating a rupture of the posterior cruciate ligament seen as an interruption in the cordlike structure (outlined).
  4854. Medial Collateral Ligament
  4855. Lateral Collateral Ligament
  4856. Ligament Injuries in the Female Athlete
  4857. Common Structural and Functional Impairments, Activity Limitations, and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  4858. Ligament Injuries: Nonoperative Management
  4859. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4860. Nonoperative Management: Maximum Protection Phase
  4861. TABLE 21.5 Nonoperative Management of MCL Injuries: Intervention for Each Phase of Rehabilitation*
  4862. Nonoperative Management: Moderate Protection (Controlled Motion) Through Return to Activity Phases
  4863. Improve Joint Mobility and Protection
  4864. Joint mobility.
  4865. Protective bracing.
  4866. Improve Muscle Performance
  4867. Strength and endurance.
  4868. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4869. Neuromuscular control.
  4870. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4871. Improve Cardiopulmonary Conditioning
  4872. Progress to Functional Training
  4873. Ligament Injuries: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4874. Background
  4875. General considerations and indications for ligament surgery.
  4876. Types of ligament surgery.
  4877. Grafts: Types, healing characteristics, and fixation.
  4878. FIGURE 21.15 Lateral view of the knee depicting graft placement for ACL reconstruction.
  4879. CLINICAL TIP
  4880. General considerations for rehabilitation.
  4881. CLINICAL TIP
  4882. Anterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
  4883. Indications for Surgery
  4884. BOX 21.8 Relative Contraindications to ACL Reconstruction
  4885. Procedures
  4886. Operative Overview
  4887. Surgical approach, graft selection, and harvesting.
  4888. Graft placement and fixation.
  4889. BOX 21.9 Advantages and Disadvantages/ Complications of the Bone-Patellar Tendon-Bone Autograft
  4890. BOX 21.10 Advantages and Disadvantages/ Complications of the Semitendinosus-Gracilis Autograft
  4891. Complications
  4892. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4893. Postoperative Management
  4894. TABLE 21.6 ACL Reconstruction: Interventions for Accelerated Postoperative Rehabilitation
  4895. Immobilization and Bracing
  4896. Types of postoperative bracing.
  4897. Brace use and initiation and progression of knee ROM.
  4898. CLINICAL TIP
  4899. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4900. Weight-Bearing Considerations
  4901. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4902. Exercise Progression
  4903. Preoperative exercise.
  4904. Postoperative exercise progression.
  4905. BOX 21.11 Exercise Precautions After ACL Reconstruction
  4906. CLINICAL TIP
  4907. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4908. Goals.
  4909. Interventions.
  4910. CLINICAL TIP
  4911. Criteria to progress to next phase.
  4912. Exercise: Moderate Protection/Controlled Motion Phase
  4913. CLINICAL TIP
  4914. Goals.
  4915. Interventions.
  4916. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4917. Criteria to progress to next phase.
  4918. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4919. Goals.
  4920. Interventions.
  4921. Return to activity.
  4922. Outcomes
  4923. Graft selection and outcomes.
  4924. Approaches to rehabilitation.
  4925. Functional bracing.
  4926. BOX 21.12 Criteria to Return to High-Demand Activities After ACL Reconstruction
  4927. Posterior Cruciate Ligament Reconstruction
  4928. Indications for Surgery
  4929. Procedures
  4930. Operative Overview
  4931. Complications
  4932. Postoperative Management
  4933. Immobilization, Protective Bracing, and Weight Bearing
  4934. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4935. Exercise Progression
  4936. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4937. BOX 21.13 Suggested Criteria for Ambulation Without Crutches After PCL Reconstruction
  4938. BOX 21.14 Exercise Precautions After PCL Reconstruction
  4939. Goals.
  4940. Interventions.
  4941. Criteria to progress to next phase.
  4942. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  4943. Goals and interventions.
  4944. Meniscus Tears: Nonoperative Management
  4945. Mechanisms of Injury
  4946. Common Structural and Functional Impairments, Activity Limitations, and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  4947. Management
  4948. FIGURE 21.16 Manipulative reduction of a medial meniscus. Internally and externally rotate the tibia as you flex the hip and knee (not shown); then laterally rotate the tibia and apply a valgus stress at the knee as you extend it. The meniscus may click into place.
  4949. Meniscus Tears: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  4950. FIGURE 21.17 Vascularity of the medial and lateral menisci. The peripheral zone (outer one-third) is highly vascular; the central one-third is relatively avascular; and the inner one-third is avascular.
  4951. Meniscus Repair
  4952. Indications for Surgery
  4953. Procedure
  4954. Operative Overview
  4955. Complications
  4956. Postoperative Management
  4957. BOX 21.15 Factors Influencing the Progression of Rehabilitation After Meniscus Repair
  4958. Immobilization, Protective Bracing, and Weight Bearing
  4959. Immobilization and protective bracing.
  4960. Weight bearing.
  4961. BOX 21.16 Exercise Precautions After Meniscus Repair*
  4962. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  4963. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  4964. Goals.
  4965. Interventions.
  4966. Criteria to progress to next phase.
  4967. Exercise: Moderate Protection/Controlled Motion Phase
  4968. Goals.
  4969. Interventions.
  4970. Criteria to progress to next phase.
  4971. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4972. Goals.
  4973. Interventions.
  4974. Outcomes
  4975. Partial Meniscectomy
  4976. Indications for Surgery
  4977. Procedure
  4978. Postoperative Management
  4979. Immobilization and Weight Bearing
  4980. Exercise: Maximum and Moderate Protection Phases
  4981. Goals.
  4982. Interventions.
  4983. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  4984. Exercise Interventions for the Knee
  4985. Exercise Techniques to Increase Flexibility and Range of Motion
  4986. To Increase Knee Extension
  4987. PNF Stretching Techniques
  4988. Gravity-Assisted Passive Stretching Techniques
  4989. Prone Hang
  4990. Supine Heel Prop
  4991. FIGURE 21.18 Heel prop in supine to increase knee extension. A cuff weight or sandbag placed across the distal femur increases the stretch force.
  4992. Self-Stretching Technique
  4993. To Increase Knee Flexion
  4994. PNF Stretching Techniques
  4995. Gravity-Assisted Passive Stretching Technique
  4996. Self-Stretching Techniques
  4997. Gravity-Assisted Supine Wall Slides
  4998. FIGURE 21.19 Gravity-assisted supine wall slide. The patient flexes the knee to the limit of its range and holds it there for a sustained stretch to the quadriceps femoris muscle.
  4999. Self-Stretch with Uninvolved Leg
  5000. Rocking Forward on a Step
  5001. FIGURE 21.20 Self-stretching on a step to increase knee flexion. The patient places the foot of the involved side on a step, then rocks forward over the stabilized foot to the limit of knee flexion to stretch the quadriceps femoris muscle. A higher step is used for greater flexion.
  5002. Sitting
  5003. FIGURE 21.21 Self-stretching in a chair to increase knee flexion. The patient fixates the foot of the involved leg on the floor and then moves forward in the chair over the stabilized foot to place a sustained stretch on the quadriceps femoris muscle and increase knee flexion.
  5004. To Increase Mobility of the IT Band at the Knee
  5005. Foam Roller Fascial Release
  5006. FIGURE 21.22 Foam roller fascial release for a tight IT band.
  5007. Exercises to Develop and Improve Muscle Performance and Functional Control
  5008. TABLE 21.7 Comparison of Forces and Muscle Action at the Knee During Dynamic Open-Chain and Closed-Chain Exercises 67,299
  5009. Open-Chain (Nonweight-Bearing) Exercises
  5010. To Develop Control and Strength of Knee Extension (Quadriceps Femoris)
  5011. Quadriceps Setting (Quad Sets)
  5012. CLINICAL TIP
  5013. Straight-Leg Raise
  5014. CLINICAL TIP
  5015. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5016. Straight-Leg Lowering
  5017. Multiple-Angle Isometric Exercises
  5018. Short-Arc Terminal Knee Extension
  5019. CLINICAL TIP
  5020. FIGURE 21.23 Short-arc terminal extension exercise to strengthen the quadriceps femoris muscle. When tolerated, resistance is added proximal to the ankle.
  5021. Full-Arc Extension
  5022. CLINICAL TIP
  5023. To Develop Control and Strength of Knee Flexion (Hamstrings)
  5024. Hamstring Setting (Hamstring Sets)
  5025. Multiple-Angle Isometric Exercises
  5026. Hamstring Curls
  5027. FIGURE 21.24 Hamstring curls; resistance exercises to the knee flexors with the patient standing. Maximal resistance occurs when the knee is at 90°.
  5028. Closed-Chain (Weight-Bearing) Exercises
  5029. Initiation of closed-chain exercises.
  5030. Partial weight-bearing and support techniques.
  5031. CLINICAL TIP
  5032. Closed-Chain Isometric Exercises
  5033. Setting Exercises for Co-Contraction
  5034. Alternating Isometrics and Rhythmic Stabilization
  5035. Closed-Chain Isometrics Against Elastic Resistance
  5036. Closed-Chain Dynamic Exercises
  5037. Scooting on a Wheeled Stool
  5038. FIGURE 21.25 Forward scooting on a wheeled stool to strengthen knee flexors and backward scooting to strengthen knee extensors.
  5039. Unilateral Closed-Chain Terminal Knee Extension
  5040. FIGURE 21.26 Unilateral closed-chain terminal knee extension.
  5041. Partial Squats, Minisquats, and Short-Arc Training
  5042. FIGURE 21.27 Resisted minisquats using elastic resistance; closed-chain short-arc training in (A) bilateral stance and (B) unilateral stance.
  5043. Standing Wall Slides
  5044. Forward, Backward, and Lateral Step-Ups and Step-Downs VIDEO 21.1
  5045. Partial and Full Lunges
  5046. FIGURE 21.28 (A) A forward step-up with manual pressure applied to the lateral thigh to reinforce proper lower extremity alignment and stimulate the gluteus medius. (B) Resisted step-ups against elastic resistance or a pulley to strengthen knee extensors.
  5047. Functional Progression for the Knee
  5048. Strength and Muscle Endurance Training
  5049. Cardiopulmonary Endurance Training
  5050. Balance and Proprioceptive Activities (Perturbation Training)
  5051. Plyometric Training and Agility Drills
  5052. Simulated Work-Related Activities and Sport-Specific Drills
  5053. Independent Learning Activities
  5054. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  5055. Laboratory Practice
  5056. Case Studies
  5057. REFERENCES
  5058. CHAPTER 22 The Ankle and Foot
  5059. Structure and Function of the Ankle and Foot
  5060. FIGURE 22.1 Bones of the ankle and foot. (A) Anterior view of the lower leg and ankle, (B) medial view, and (C) lateral view of the ankle and foot.
  5061. Structural Relationships and Motions
  5062. Anatomical Characteristics
  5063. Leg
  5064. Foot
  5065. Hindfoot.
  5066. Midfoot.
  5067. Forefoot.
  5068. Motions of the Foot and Ankle Defined
  5069. Primary Plane Motions
  5070. Sagittal plane motion around a frontal (coronal axis).
  5071. Frontal plane motion around a sagittal (anteroposterior) axis.
  5072. Transverse plane motion around a vertical axis.
  5073. Triplanar Motion
  5074. Pronation.
  5075. Supination.
  5076. Joint Characteristics and Arthrokinematics: Leg, Ankle, and Foot
  5077. Tibiofibular Joints
  5078. Superior tibiofibular joint characteristics.
  5079. Inferior tibiofibular joint characteristics.
  5080. Accessory motions.
  5081. Ankle (Talocrural) Joint
  5082. Characteristics.
  5083. CLINICAL TIP
  5084. Arthrokinematics.
  5085. FIGURE 22.2 Ligaments of the ankle and foot. (A) Medial view, (B) lateral view, and (C) posterior (cross-sectional) view.
  5086. BOX 22.1 Arthrokinematics of the Ankle and Foot Joints
  5087. Subtalar (Talocalcaneal) Joint
  5088. Characteristics.
  5089. Arthrokinematics.
  5090. Talonavicular Joint
  5091. Characteristics.
  5092. Arthrokinematics.
  5093. Transverse Tarsal Joint
  5094. Characteristics.
  5095. Arthrokinematics.
  5096. Remaining Intertarsal and Tarsometatarsal Joints
  5097. Metatarsophalangeal and Interphalangeal Joints of the Toes
  5098. Function of the Ankle and Foot
  5099. Structural Relationships
  5100. Interdependence of leg and foot motions.
  5101. Arches.
  5102. Effect on posture.
  5103. Abnormal foot postures.
  5104. Muscle Function in the Ankle and Foot
  5105. Plantarflexors.
  5106. Secondary plantarflexors.
  5107. Dorsiflexors.
  5108. Intrinsic muscles.
  5109. Stability in standing.
  5110. The Ankle/Foot Complex and Gait
  5111. Function of the Ankle and Foot Joints During Gait
  5112. Muscle Control of the Ankle and Foot During Gait
  5113. Ankle dorsiflexors.
  5114. Ankle plantarflexors.
  5115. Ankle evertors.
  5116. Ankle inverters.
  5117. Intrinsic muscles.
  5118. Referred Pain and Nerve Injury
  5119. Major Nerves Subject to Pressure and Trauma
  5120. Common fibular (perineal) nerve.
  5121. Posterior tibial nerve.
  5122. Plantar and calcaneal nerves.
  5123. Common Sources of Segmental Sensory Reference in the Foot
  5124. Management of Foot and Ankle Disorders and Surgeries
  5125. Joint Hypomobility: Nonoperative Management
  5126. Common Joint Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  5127. TABLE 22.1 Foot and Ankle Pathologies/Surgical Procedures and Preferred Practice Patterns
  5128. RA.
  5129. DJD and joint trauma.
  5130. Postimmobilization stiffness.
  5131. Gout.
  5132. Common Structural and Functional Impairments, Activity Limitations, and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  5133. BOX 22.2 Common Arthritis-Related Forefoot Deformities
  5134. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Protection Phase
  5135. Educate the Patient and Provide Joint Protection
  5136. Decrease Pain
  5137. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5138. Maintain Joint and Soft Tissue Mobility and Muscle Integrity
  5139. Joint Hypomobility: Management—Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  5140. Increase Joint Play and Accessory Motions
  5141. Joint mobilization techniques.
  5142. CLINICAL TIP
  5143. Improve Joint Tracking of the Talocrural Joint
  5144. MWM: Plantarflexion
  5145. FIGURE 22.3 Mobilization with movement (MWM) to increase ankle plantarflexion. Maintain a posterior glide of the tibia while moving the talus into plantarflexion. This should not cause pain.
  5146. MWM: Dorsiflexion
  5147. FIGURE 22.4 MWM to increase ankle dorsiflexion. Maintain an anterior glide of the tibia with the mobilization belt while the patient lunges forward to move the ankle into dorsiflexion. This should not cause pain.
  5148. Increase Mobility of Soft Tissues and Muscles
  5149. Regain Balance in Muscle Strength and Prepare for Functional Activities
  5150. CLINICAL TIP
  5151. Improve Balance and Proprioception
  5152. Develop Cardiopulmonary Fitness
  5153. Joint Surgery and Postoperative Management
  5154. FIGURE 22.5 Late-stage arthritis of the ankle. (A) Mortise view of the ankle shows severe loss of the normal joint space and partial erosion of the lateral tibia. (B) Lateral view shows tibial erosion with mild joint space loss in the subtalar region and significant osteophyte formation in the anterior ankle.
  5155. BOX 22.3 Surgical Interventions for Early- and Late-Stage Ankle or Foot Arthritis and Joint Deformity
  5156. Total Ankle Arthroplasty
  5157. Indications for Surgery
  5158. Contraindications
  5159. Procedure
  5160. Implant Design, Materials, and Fixation
  5161. FIGURE 22.6 Total ankle arthroplasty. Lateral view of a total ankle replacement in a 78-year-old woman, one year after surgery for post-traumatic arthritis.
  5162. Operative Overview
  5163. Complications
  5164. BOX 22.4 Complications of Total Ankle Arthroplasty
  5165. Postoperative Management
  5166. Immobilization and Weight-Bearing Considerations
  5167. Immobilization.
  5168. Weight-bearing considerations.
  5169. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  5170. Goal and interventions.
  5171. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  5172. CLINICAL TIP
  5173. Goals and interventions.
  5174. CLINICAL TIP
  5175. Return to fitness and sports activities.
  5176. Outcomes
  5177. Pain relief, functional improvement, and patient satisfaction in different populations.
  5178. Participation in physical activities.
  5179. Arthrodesis of the Ankle and Foot
  5180. Indications for Surgery
  5181. Procedures
  5182. Common Types of Arthrodesis
  5183. Arthrodesis of the ankle.
  5184. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5185. Arthrodesis of the hindfoot.
  5186. Arthrodesis of the first toe.
  5187. Arthrodesis of the IP joints of the toes.
  5188. Complications
  5189. Postoperative Management
  5190. Immobilization.
  5191. Weight-bearing considerations.
  5192. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5193. Postoperative exercises.
  5194. Return to physical activities.
  5195. Outcomes
  5196. Long-term outcomes.
  5197. Leg, Heel, and Foot Pain: Nonoperative Management
  5198. Related Pathologies and Etiology of Symptoms
  5199. Heel Pain
  5200. Plantar fasciitis.
  5201. Achilles tendinopathy (Achilles tendinitis/Achilles bursitis).
  5202. Tendinosis, Tendonitis, and Tenosynovitis
  5203. Shin Splints
  5204. Anterior shin splints.
  5205. Posterior shin splints.
  5206. Common Structural and Functional Impairments, Activity Limitations, and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  5207. Leg, Heel, Foot Pain: Management—Protection Phase
  5208. Leg, Heel, Foot Pain: Management—Controlled Motion and Return to Function Phases
  5209. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5210. Educate the Patient and Provide Home Exercises
  5211. Stretch Range-Limiting Structures
  5212. CLINICAL TIP
  5213. Improve Muscle Performance
  5214. Ligamentous Injuries: Nonoperative Management
  5215. Common Structural and Functional Impairments, Activity Limitations, and Participation Restrictions (Functional Limitations/Disabilities)
  5216. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5217. Acute Ankle Sprain: Management—Protection Phase
  5218. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5219. Ankle Sprain: Management—Controlled Motion Phase
  5220. Ankle Sprain: Management—Return to Function Phase
  5221. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5222. Traumatic Soft Tissue Injuries: Surgical and Postoperative Management
  5223. Repair of Complete Lateral Ankle Ligament Tears
  5224. FIGURE 22.7 A complete tear of the lateral collateral ligament complex as the result of a severe (grade 3) inversion injury of the ankle.
  5225. Indications for Surgery
  5226. Procedures
  5227. Types of Stabilization Procedures
  5228. FIGURE 22.8 Lateral view of the ankle depicting reconstruction of torn ATF and CF ligaments using a tendon graft to augment stability. Proximal advancement and suturing of the extensor retinaculum (not shown) over the reconstructed ligaments to the distal fibula provide additional stability.
  5229. Direct repair.
  5230. Reconstruction with augmentation.
  5231. Arthroscopic thermally assisted capsular shift.
  5232. Operative Overview
  5233. Postoperative Management
  5234. Immobilization and Weight-Bearing Considerations
  5235. Immobilization.
  5236. Weight-bearing considerations.
  5237. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  5238. Goals and interventions.
  5239. Exercise: Moderate and Minimum Protection Phases
  5240. CLINICAL TIP
  5241. Goals and interventions.
  5242. CLINICAL TIP
  5243. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5244. Outcomes
  5245. BOX 22.5 Activity-Related Precautions to Reduce the Risk of Re-injury After Lateral Ligament Reconstruction of the Ankle
  5246. Repair of a Ruptured Achilles Tendon
  5247. Indications for Surgery
  5248. Procedures
  5249. Primary versus Delayed Repair
  5250. Operative Overview
  5251. Primary repair.
  5252. Delayed repair/reconstruction.
  5253. Complications
  5254. BOX 22.6 Complications Following Primary Repair of a Ruptured Achilles Tendon
  5255. Postoperative Management
  5256. TABLE 22.2 Conventional Postoperative Management After Achilles Tendon Repair or Reconstruction with Graft*
  5257. Immobilization and Weight-Bearing Considerations: Conventional versus Early Remobilization Approaches
  5258. Conventional approach.
  5259. Early remobilization and weight-bearing approach.
  5260. BOX 22.7 Features of Early Weight-bearing and Remobilization Programs After Repair of Acute Achilles Tendon Rupture*
  5261. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5262. Exercise Progression
  5263. Exercise: Maximum Protection Phase
  5264. Goals and interventions.
  5265. Exercise: Moderate Protection Phase
  5266. Goals and interventions.
  5267. BOX 22.8 Precautions and Guidelines for Exercise and Functional Activities Following Achilles Tendon Repair*
  5268. CLINICAL TIP
  5269. Exercise: Minimum Protection/Return to Function Phase
  5270. Outcomes
  5271. Nonoperative versus operative management.
  5272. Open versus percutaneous repair.
  5273. Traditional versus accelerated rehabilitation.
  5274. Exercise Interventions for the Ankle and Foot
  5275. Exercise Techniques to Increase Flexibility and Range of Motion
  5276. Flexibility Exercises for the Ankle Region
  5277. Increase Dorsiflexion of the Ankle
  5278. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5279. FIGURE 22.9 Self-stretching the ankle to increase dorsiflexion (stretching the gastrocnemius muscle).
  5280. Increase Inversion
  5281. FIGURE 22.10 Self-stretching the foot into inversion by pulling on the towel on the medial side of the foot.
  5282. Increase Ankle Plantarflexion and Eversion
  5283. Increase Eversion and Ankle Dorsiflexion
  5284. Flexibility Exercises for Limited Mobility of the Toes
  5285. Passive MTP Flexion
  5286. Passive IP Extension
  5287. Active MTP Flexion
  5288. Great Toe Extension
  5289. Stretching the Plantar Fascia of the Foot
  5290. Exercises to Develop and Improve Muscle Performance and Functional Control
  5291. Exercises to Develop Dynamic Neuromuscular Control
  5292. FIGURE 22.11 Using a rocker board to develop control of ankle motions with the patient sitting. When both feet are on the board, the normal foot can assist the involved side. With only the involved foot on the board, the activity is more difficult.
  5293. Open-Chain (Nonweight-Bearing) Strengthening Exercises
  5294. Plantarflexion
  5295. FIGURE 22.12 Resisting the ankle plantarflexor muscles with an elasticized material.
  5296. Isometric Eversion and Inversion
  5297. Eversion and Inversion with Elastic Resistance
  5298. FIGURE 22.13 Resisting the evertor muscles of the foot with an elasticized material.
  5299. Adduction with Inversion and Abduction with Eversion Using Weights
  5300. FIGURE 22.14 Resisting adduction and inversion with a weight on the end of the towel. The heel is kept stationary while a windshield wiper motion of the foot is used to pull the towel along the floor. Abduction with eversion is resisted by placing the weight on the towel on the medial side of the foot.
  5301. Dorsiflexion
  5302. FIGURE 22.15 Resisting the ankle dorsiflexor muscles with an elasticized material.
  5303. All Ankle Motions
  5304. Closed-Chain (Weight-Bearing) Exercises
  5305. Stabilization Exercises
  5306. FIGURE 22.16 Stabilization exercises with the patient standing and maintaining balance against the alternating resistance forces from the therapist. The therapist applies force through the rod in backward/ forward, side-to-side, and rotational directions.
  5307. Dynamic Strength Training
  5308. BOX 22.9 A Progression of Heel-Raising/ Lowering Exercises for Calf Muscle Strengthening
  5309. FIGURE 22.17 Eccentric loading of the gastrocnemius-soleus muscle group by performing heel lowering of the affected ankle.
  5310. CLINICAL TIP
  5311. Resisted Walking
  5312. FIGURE 22.18 (A) Starting position for activation of the ankle dorsiflexors of the weight-bearing limb by moving opposite limb forward against resistance of an elastic band; (B) ending position.
  5313. Functional Progression for the Ankle and Foot
  5314. FIGURE 22.19 (A) Starting position for activation of the ankle plantarflexors of the weight-bearing limb by moving opposite limb backward against resistance of an elastic band; (B) ending position.
  5315. Independent Learning Activities
  5316. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  5317. Laboratory Practice
  5318. Case Studies
  5319. REFERENCES
  5320. CHAPTER 23 Advanced Functional Training
  5321. CLINICAL TIP
  5322. Exercises for Stability and Balance
  5323. Guidelines Revisited
  5324. Joint stability.
  5325. Postural stability and balance.
  5326. CLINICAL TIP
  5327. Advanced Stabilization and Balance Exercises
  5328. Sitting
  5329. TABLE 23.1 Parameters for Progressing Balance Exercises
  5330. Sitting and Reaching
  5331. Sitting with External Perturbations
  5332. FIGURE 23.1 Resisted reaching movements while maintaining sitting balance on an unstable surface.
  5333. FIGURE 23.2 Maintaining sitting balance while catching and returning a ball.
  5334. Kneeling
  5335. Kneeling on a Stable Surface
  5336. FIGURE 23.3 Balancing in half-kneeling position (A) while performing diagonal patterns against elastic resistance; and (B) while moving a weighted object from a chair to the floor.
  5337. Kneeling on an Unstable Surface
  5338. FIGURE 23.4 Balancing in high-kneeling position on a BOSU® while catching and tossing a ball.
  5339. Bilateral Stance
  5340. Bilateral Stance on a Stable Surface VIDEO 23.1
  5341. FIGURE 23.5 Balancing in tandem stance on a balance beam with quick alternating resistance applied against the pelvis.
  5342. Bilateral Stance on an Unstable Surface VIDEO 23.2
  5343. FIGURE 23.6 Balancing in bilateral stance on a balance board while performing arm movements.
  5344. FIGURE 23.7 Balancing in bilateral stance on a BOSU® while catching and tossing a ball.
  5345. FIGURE 23.8 Balancing on an unstable surface while performing partial squats.
  5346. Unilateral Stance
  5347. Unilateral Stance on a Stable Surface VIDEO 23.3
  5348. FIGURE 23.9 Balancing in unilateral stance while performing upper extremity diagonal patterns against elastic resistance: (A) unilaterally; and (B) bilaterally.
  5349. FIGURE 23.10 Maintaining balance while touching one foot on each of the lines of a star pattern on the floor and returning to the center; (A) diagonally backward and (B) crossed behind stationary leg.
  5350. FIGURE 23.11 Balancing in unilateral stance while performing a diagonal pattern with one lower extremity. Upper extremity motions add additional challenges to balance.
  5351. FIGURE 23.12 Partial squatting in unilateral stance, leaning to one side and picking up an object.
  5352. FIGURE 23.13 Maintaining balance in unilateral stance: (A) while bending forward at the hips and reaching out with both arms; and (B) while performing a windmill motion using handheld weights.
  5353. Unilateral Stance on an Unstable Surface
  5354. FIGURE 23.14 Perturbations in unilateral stance using elastic resistance while on a balance disc.
  5355. Moving and Planting Activities VIDEO 23.4
  5356. Jump and “Freeze”
  5357. Side Shuffle and “Freeze”
  5358. Run and “Freeze”
  5359. FIGURE 23.15 Jump and freeze sequence and progression: (A) jumping down from a step and holding the end position and (B) hopping up onto a step and holding the end position.
  5360. Exercises for Strength and Power
  5361. FIGURE 23.16 Side shuffle and freeze.
  5362. CLINICAL TIP
  5363. Advanced Strengthening Exercises
  5364. Advanced Strengthening: Upper Extremities
  5365. Exercises with a BodyBlade®
  5366. Upper Extremity Weight-Bearing Exercises Using Selected Equipment
  5367. FIGURE 23.17 Exercises with a BodyBlade®: (A) bilateral isometric strengthening of shoulder rotators with additional activation of trunk stabilizers; and (B) unilateral isometric strengthening of elbow flexors/extensors.
  5368. Pushing/Pulling and Lifting/Lowering Exercises
  5369. FIGURE 23.18 Strengthening shoulder and elbow musculature by pulling (sliding) a heavy object from one position to another.
  5370. FIGURE 23.19 Strengthening shoulder and elbow musculature by lifting or lowering a heavy object to and from a high surface.
  5371. Seated Push-Ups on Unstable Surfaces VIDEO 23.5
  5372. Prone Push-Ups in a Head-Down Position
  5373. FIGURE 23.20 Seated push-ups in a long-sitting position (A) with lower legs on an unstable (soft) surface; and (B) with hands on an unstable surface.
  5374. FIGURE 23.21 Prone push-ups in a head-down position.
  5375. Upper Extremity Step-Ups Combined with Prone Push-Ups VIDEO 23.5
  5376. FIGURE 23.22 Upper extremity step-up with the right upper extremity following a prone push-up.
  5377. Prone Push-ups on Unstable Surfaces
  5378. FIGURE 23.23 Prone push-ups on unstable surfaces: (A) with hands on the floor and knees on a foam roller; (B) with hands on a small ball and feet on the floor; and (C) with hands on a BOSU® and knees on a foam roller.
  5379. Ball “Walk-Out” VIDEO 23.5
  5380. Plantar-Grade “Walking”
  5381. FIGURE 23.24 Ball “walk-out” on hands with lower extremities rolling on a large therapy ball.
  5382. Advanced Strengthening: Lower Extremities VIDEO 23.6
  5383. Unilateral Supine Pelvic Bridges
  5384. Supine Pelvic Bridges on an Elevated Surface
  5385. Supine Hamstring Curls on a Ball VIDEO 23.6
  5386. FIGURE 23.25 Unilateral supine pelvic bridge on an unstable surface while holding a weighted ball in both hands for additional resistance.
  5387. FIGURE 23.26 Supine pelvic bridge with the lower extremities elevated on a platform or chair and hands on the floor.
  5388. FIGURE 23.27 Supine hamstring curls on a ball.
  5389. Hamstrings or Quadriceps Strengthening: Kneeling
  5390. Unilateral Wall Slides: Standing
  5391. FIGURE 23.28 (A) Strengthening the hamstrings against the resistance of body weight by leaning forward from a high-kneeling position; (B) strengthening the quadriceps by leaning backward from the high-kneeling position while holding a weighted for additional resistance.
  5392. FIGURE 23.29 Unilateral wallslides in standing with a midrange hold.
  5393. Deep Squats
  5394. Variations of Lunges VIDEO 23.6
  5395. FIGURE 23.30 Deep squats with an end-range hold, while trying to keep the knees posterior to the toes.
  5396. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5397. FIGURE 23.31 (A) Deep forward lunge while lightly touching a stable surface for balance; (B) multidirectional lunges on a star pattern on the floor; and (C) deep lateral lunge against elastic resistance.
  5398. Sitting Down and Standing Up from a Chair Against Elastic Resistance
  5399. Bilateral or Unilateral Heel-Lowering Over a Step
  5400. Band Walking
  5401. FIGURE 23.32 (A) Sitting down; and (B) standing up against elastic resistance.
  5402. FIGURE 23.33 Heel-lowering over a step while holding weights for additional resistance.
  5403. FIGURE 23.34 Band walking: (A) in a forward direction; and (B) in a sideward direction against elastic resistance looped around the pelvis.
  5404. FIGURE 23.35 Band walking in a forward direction against elastic resistance looped around the thighs for closed-chain strengthening of the hip external rotators.
  5405. Pulling or Pushing a Heavy Object
  5406. FIGURE 23.36 Pulling increasingly heavy objects across the floor.
  5407. Resisted Running Start and Resisted Running
  5408. FIGURE 23.37 Resisted running start.
  5409. Plyometric Training: Stretch-Shortening Drills
  5410. Definitions and Characteristics
  5411. FIGURE 23.38 Plyometric lower extremity sequence against the resistance of body weight: (A) patient stands on a low platform; (B) jumps off the platform to the floor, controlling the impact with a loaded, lengthening contraction of the hip and knee extensors and plantar flexors—the stretch phase; and (C) then without delay jumps forward onto the next platform using a concentric contraction of the same muscle groups—the shortening phase.
  5412. BOX 23.1 Plyometric Activities for the Upper and Lower Extremities
  5413. Neurological and Biomechanical Influences
  5414. Effects of Plyometric Training
  5415. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5416. Application and Progression of Plyometric Exercises
  5417. Preparation for plyometrics.
  5418. Specificity of training.
  5419. Progression and parameters.
  5420. BOX 23.2 Sample Plyometric Sequence for the Upper Extremities
  5421. Precautions.
  5422. Plyometric Exercises: Upper Extremities
  5423. BOX 23.3 Precautions for Plyometric Training
  5424. Bilateral Diagonal Upper Extremity Movements
  5425. Bilateral Chest Press and Throw: Supine
  5426. Bilateral Chest Press and Throw: Standing
  5427. Bilateral Overhead Catch and Throw
  5428. FIGURE 23.39 Bilateral chest press and throw—supine.
  5429. FIGURE 23.40 Bilateral chest press and throw—standing.
  5430. FIGURE 23.41 Bilateral overhead catch and throw.
  5431. Bilateral Horizontal Side Throw and Catch VIDEO 23.7
  5432. Hand-to-Hand Overhead Catch and Throw
  5433. Unilateral Plyometric Shoulder Exercises Using Elastic Resistance
  5434. FIGURE 23.42 Bilateral side throw and catch using horizontal abduction and adduction of the shoulders and trunk rotation.
  5435. FIGURE 23.43 Hand-to-hand overhead catch and throw.
  5436. FIGURE 23.44 Unilateral plyometric exercise for the shoulder external rotators using elastic resistance.
  5437. Bounce a Weighted Ball: Prone-Lying
  5438. Unilateral Side Catch and Throw
  5439. FIGURE 23.45 Unilateral plyometric exercise for the shoulder internal rotators—bounce a weighted ball in the prone-lying position.
  5440. FIGURE 23.46 Unilateral plyometric exercise for the shoulder internal rotators: (A) side catch and throw; and (B) a simulated baseball throw with the shoulder abducted to 90° and elbow flexed.
  5441. Unilateral Reverse Catch and Throw
  5442. Throw and Catch with Elbow Action
  5443. FIGURE 23.47 Unilateral plyometric exercise for the shoulder external rotators—reverse catch and throw: The patient: (A) catches a soft, lightweight object with the shoulder abducted and externally rotated and the elbow flexed; (B) allows the shoulder to internally rotate with control; and (C) externally rotates the shoulder to throw the object back to the therapist.
  5444. Unilateral Throw and Catch with Wrist Action
  5445. FIGURE 23.48 Unilateral plyometric exercise targeting the elbow flexors.
  5446. FIGURE 23.49 Unilateral plyometric exercise targeting the wrist flexors.
  5447. Simulated Sport Activities
  5448. FIGURE 23.50 Dribble a ball against the wall to target the wrist flexors.
  5449. Upper Extremity Weight-Bearing Movements on a Slide Board
  5450. FIGURE 23.51 Using a short-handled racquet, bounce a ball into the air with the forearm pronated to target the wrist extensors.
  5451. FIGURE 23.52 Practice a golf swing using a weighted club.
  5452. FIGURE 23.53 Bilateral plyometric exercise while bearing weight through the upper extremities—side-to-side movements with quick changes of direction on a ProFitter®.
  5453. Push-Offs from a Wall
  5454. FIGURE 23.54 Repeated push-offs from a wall: (A) falling directly forward toward the wall and catching self with both hands; and (B) pushing away from the wall to the upright position.
  5455. Side-to-Side Push-Offs from a Waist-Level Surface VIDEO 23.8
  5456. Variations of Prone Push-Ups VIDEO 23.8
  5457. FIGURE 23.55 Alternating side-to-side push-offs to and from a stable, waist-high surface.
  5458. FIGURE 23.56 Drop push-ups in the prone position: (A) Starting position; (B) prone push-up; and (C) drop hands to floor, allowing elbows to flex. Push up from the floor and quickly return hands to platforms as in (A).
  5459. Plyometric Exercises: Lower Extremities
  5460. CLINICAL TIP
  5461. Kicking a Ball
  5462. Sit-to-Stand from a Ball
  5463. FIGURE 23.57 Moving from sit-to-stand by bouncing on a ball.
  5464. Bilateral Heel Raises on a Mini-Trampoline
  5465. FIGURE 23.58 Side-to-side movements on a Pro-Fitter®.
  5466. FIGURE 23.59 Squat jumps: (A) from a squat position, perform a (B) vertical jump.
  5467. FIGURE 23.60 Bounding: a series of forward jumps across a floor.
  5468. Side-to-Side Shuffle
  5469. Side-to-Side Movements on a Slide Board
  5470. Squat Jumps VIDEO 23.9
  5471. FIGURE 23.61 Four-quadrant jumping or hopping.
  5472. Bounding
  5473. Four-Quadrant Jumps or Hops VIDEO 23.9
  5474. Tuck Jumps
  5475. FIGURE 23.62 Tuck jump.
  5476. FIGURE 23.63 (A), (B), and (C) Lunge-jumps: alternately landing with right, then left lower extremity forward.
  5477. Lunge Jumps VIDEO 23.9
  5478. Zigzag Forward Jumping or Hopping
  5479. Hopping Over Objects VIDEO 23.9
  5480. Single Platform Jumping or Hopping
  5481. Multiple Platform Jumping or Hopping
  5482. FIGURE 23.64 Zigzag forward hopping.
  5483. FIGURE 23.65 Lateral hopping over objects of varying sizes set up in an obstacle course on the floor.
  5484. FIGURE 23.66 Hopping onto and off of a single platform using proper landing technique.
  5485. Independent Learning Activities
  5486. Critical Thinking Questions
  5487. Laboratory Activities
  5488. Case Studies
  5489. Case Study #1
  5490. Case Study #2
  5491. Additional Case Studies
  5492. REFERENCES
  5493. V Special Areas of Therapeutic Exercise
  5494. CHAPTER 24 Women’s Health: Obstetrics and Pelvic Floor
  5495. Overview of Pregnancy, Labor, and Related Conditions
  5496. Characteristics of Pregnancy and Labor
  5497. Pregnancy
  5498. First Trimester Changes
  5499. Second Trimester Changes
  5500. Third Trimester Changes
  5501. Labor
  5502. FIGURE 24.1 Effacement and dilation of the cervix.
  5503. Labor: Stage 1
  5504. Cervical dilation phase.
  5505. Middle phase.
  5506. Transition phase.
  5507. Labor: Stage 2
  5508. FIGURE 24.2 Principal movements in the mechanism of labor and delivery, left occiput anterior position.
  5509. Fetal descent.
  5510. Expulsion.
  5511. Labor: Stage 3
  5512. Placental stage (expulsion of the placenta).
  5513. Uterine involution.
  5514. Anatomical and Physiological Changes of Pregnancy
  5515. Weight Gain During Pregnancy
  5516. BOX 24.1 Total Weight Gain (Ranges) for Single Fetus
  5517. Changes in Organ Systems
  5518. Uterus and Related Connective Tissue
  5519. Uterus.
  5520. Connective tissues.
  5521. Urinary System
  5522. Kidneys.
  5523. Ureters.
  5524. Pulmonary System
  5525. Hormonal influences.
  5526. Respiration.
  5527. Cardiovascular System
  5528. Blood volume and pressure.
  5529. Heart.
  5530. Musculoskeletal System
  5531. Abdominal muscles.
  5532. Pelvic floor muscles.
  5533. Connective tissues and joints.
  5534. Thermoregulatory System
  5535. Metabolic rate.
  5536. Changes in Posture and Balance
  5537. Center of Gravity
  5538. Balance
  5539. Overview of Pelvic Floor Anatomy, Function, and Dysfunction
  5540. FIGURE 24.3 Pelvic floor muscles. (A) Sagittal section—note sling/hammock orientation; (B) viewed from below—note figure-eight orientation of the muscles around the orifice of the urethra/ vagina and the anal sphincter; and (C) posterior view—note the funnel shape of the pelvic muscles.
  5541. Pelvic Floor Musculature
  5542. Female Pelvic Floor
  5543. Innervation
  5544. TABLE 24.1 Pelvic Floor Anatomy: From Superficial to Deep
  5545. Function
  5546. Effect of Childbirth on the Pelvic Floor
  5547. Neurological Compromise
  5548. Muscular Impairment
  5549. Episiotomy
  5550. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5551. Classification of Pelvic Floor Dysfunction
  5552. Prolapse
  5553. FIGURE 24.4 (A) Good pelvic floor support with a firm base, organs in normal position. (B) Inadequate support, pelvic organs descend.
  5554. Urinary or Fecal Incontinence
  5555. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5556. Pain and Hypertonus
  5557. Risk Factors for Dysfunction
  5558. Childbirth
  5559. Other Causes
  5560. Interventions for Pelvic Floor Impairments
  5561. Patient Education
  5562. Teach the patient about pelvic floor anatomy and function.
  5563. Provide individual instruction in exercise performance.
  5564. Neuromuscular Reeducation
  5565. Facilitate pelvic floor muscular activation.
  5566. Biofeedback
  5567. Use biofeedback with instrumentation.
  5568. Combine biofeedback with exercises.
  5569. Manual Treatment and Modalities
  5570. Pregnancy-Induced Pathology
  5571. Diastasis Recti
  5572. FIGURE 24.5 Diagrammatic representations of diastasis recti.
  5573. Incidence
  5574. Significance
  5575. Activity limitations.
  5576. Decreased fetal protection.
  5577. Potential for herniation.
  5578. Examination for Diastasis Recti
  5579. FIGURE 24.6 Diastasis recti test.
  5580. Intervention for Diastasis Recti
  5581. Posture-Related Back Pain
  5582. Incidence
  5583. Characteristics
  5584. Interventions
  5585. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5586. Sacroiliac/Pelvic Girdle Pain
  5587. Characteristics
  5588. Interventions
  5589. Activity modification.
  5590. Exercise modification.
  5591. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5592. External stabilization.
  5593. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5594. Varicose Veins
  5595. Characteristics
  5596. Interventions
  5597. Exercise modification.
  5598. External support.
  5599. Joint Laxity
  5600. Significance
  5601. Interventions
  5602. Exercise modification.
  5603. Aerobic exercise.
  5604. Nerve Compression Syndromes
  5605. Causes
  5606. Interventions
  5607. Exercise Interventions for Pregnancy, Labor, and Related Conditions
  5608. Physiological Effects of Aerobic Exercise During Pregnancy
  5609. Maternal Response to Aerobic Exercise
  5610. Blood Flow
  5611. Respiratory Rate
  5612. Hematocrit Level
  5613. Inferior Vena Cava Compression
  5614. Energy Needs
  5615. Core Temperature
  5616. Uterine Contractions
  5617. Responses of Healthy Women
  5618. Fetal Response to Maternal Aerobic Exercise
  5619. Blood Flow
  5620. Fetal Heart Rate
  5621. Heat Dissipation
  5622. Newborn Status
  5623. Exercise for the Uncomplicated Pregnancy and Postpartum
  5624. BOX 24.2 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Pregnancy and Postpartum
  5625. BOX 24.3 Suggested Sequence for Exercises Classes
  5626. Guidelines for Managing the Pregnant Woman
  5627. Examination.
  5628. Education.
  5629. FIGURE 24.7 To prevent inferior vena cava compression when the patient is lying supine, a folded towel can be placed under the right side of the pelvis so the patient is tipped slightly to the left.
  5630. Stretching/flexibility.
  5631. CLINICAL TIP
  5632. Muscle performance and aerobic fitness.
  5633. CLINICAL TIP
  5634. Recommendations for Fitness Exercise
  5635. BOX 24.4 Borg Rating Scale for Perceived Exertion (RPE)15
  5636. Precautions and Contraindications to Exercise
  5637. Absolute Contraindications
  5638. Precautions to Exercise
  5639. Critical Areas of Emphasis and Selected Exercise Techniques
  5640. Posture Exercises
  5641. Corrective Exercises for Diastasis Recti
  5642. Head Lift
  5643. BOX 24.5 Selected Stretching and Resistance Exercises During Pregnancy
  5644. FIGURE 24.8 Corrective exercise for diastasis recti. The patient gently approximates the rectus muscle toward the midline by pulling with the crossed arms.
  5645. Head Lift with Pelvic Tilt
  5646. Stabilization Exercises
  5647. Dynamic Trunk Exercises
  5648. Pelvic Motion Training
  5649. Pelvic tilt exercises.
  5650. Pelvic clock.
  5651. Pelvic clock progressions.
  5652. Trunk Curls
  5653. Modified Upper and Lower Extremity Strengthening
  5654. Standing Push-Ups
  5655. Supine Bridging
  5656. Quadruped Leg Raising
  5657. Modified Squatting
  5658. FIGURE 24.9 All-fours leg-raising. (A) Patient assumes quadruped position with posterior pelvic tilt. (B) Leg is raised only until it is in line with the trunk.
  5659. Scapular Retraction
  5660. Perineum and Adductor Flexibility
  5661. Self-Stretching
  5662. Pelvic Floor Awareness, Training, and Strengthening
  5663. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5664. Contract-Relax
  5665. Quick Contractions
  5666. “Elevator” Exercise
  5667. Pelvic Floor Relaxation
  5668. Relaxation and Breathing Exercises for Use During Labor
  5669. Visual Imagery
  5670. Muscle Setting
  5671. Selective Tension
  5672. CLINICAL TIP
  5673. Breathing
  5674. Relaxation and Breathing During Labor
  5675. First Stage
  5676. Second Stage
  5677. FIGURE 24.10 The use of a stability ball in labor can provide relief of back pain and the comfort of rhythmical, relaxing movements. The labor coach can massage the back and/or hip muscles and apply heat or ice if desired.
  5678. Unsafe Postures and Exercises During Pregnancy
  5679. Bilateral straight-leg raising.
  5680. “Fire hydrant” exercise.
  5681. All-fours (quadruped) hip extension.
  5682. Unilateral weight-bearing activities.
  5683. Exercise Critical to the Postpartum Period
  5684. Pelvic floor strengthening.
  5685. Diastasis recti correction.
  5686. Aerobic and strengthening exercises.
  5687. Cesarean Childbirth
  5688. Significance to Physical Therapists
  5689. Surgical Risks
  5690. Interventions
  5691. Pelvic floor rehabilitation.
  5692. Postsurgical rehabilitation.
  5693. BOX 24.6 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—Postcesarean Section
  5694. Emotional support.
  5695. Suggested Activities for the Patient Following a Cesarean Section
  5696. Exercises
  5697. Coughing or Huffing
  5698. Interventions to Relieve Intestinal Gas Pains
  5699. Abdominal massage or kneading.
  5700. Pelvic tilting and/or bridging.
  5701. Bridge and twist.
  5702. Scar Mobilization
  5703. High-Risk Pregnancy
  5704. High-Risk Conditions
  5705. Premature onset of labor.
  5706. Preterm rupture of membranes.
  5707. Incompetent cervix.
  5708. Placenta previa.
  5709. Pregnancy-related hypertension or preeclampsia.
  5710. Multiple gestation.
  5711. Diabetes.
  5712. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5713. Management Guidelines and Precautions for High-Risk Pregnancies
  5714. BOX 24.7 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—High-Risk Pregnancy
  5715. Exercise Suggestions with High-Risk Pregnancies
  5716. BOX 24.8 Bed Exercises for High-Risk Pregnancy
  5717. Positioning
  5718. Range of Motion (ROM)
  5719. Ambulation/Standing
  5720. Relaxation Techniques, Bed Mobility, and Transfer Activities
  5721. Preparation for Labor
  5722. Postpartum Exercise Instruction
  5723. Independent Learning Activities
  5724. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  5725. Laboratory Practice
  5726. Case Studies
  5727. Clinical Findings
  5728. Clinical Findings
  5729. WEB RESOURCES
  5730. REFERENCES
  5731. CHAPTER 25 Management of Lymphatic Disorders
  5732. Disorders of the Lymphatic System
  5733. Structure and Function of the Lymphatic System
  5734. FIGURE 25.1 Major vessels of the lymphatic system.
  5735. Anatomy of the Lymphatic System
  5736. FIGURE 25.2 Lymph capillary and larger lymph vessel.
  5737. Physiology of the Lymphatic System
  5738. Types of Lymphedema
  5739. Primary Lymphedema
  5740. Secondary Lymphedema
  5741. Surgical Dissection of Lymph Nodes
  5742. Infection and Inflammation
  5743. Obstruction or Fibrosis
  5744. Combined Venous-Lymphatic Dysfunction
  5745. Clinical Manifestations of Lymphatic Disorders
  5746. Lymphedema
  5747. Location.
  5748. Severity.
  5749. CLINICAL TIP
  5750. BOX 25.1 Severity of Lymphedema
  5751. Increased Size of the Limb
  5752. Sensory Disturbances
  5753. Stiffness and Limited Range of Motion
  5754. BOX 25.2 Stages of Lymphedema
  5755. Decreased Resistance to Infection
  5756. Examination and Evaluation of Lymphatic Function
  5757. History and Systems Review
  5758. Examination of Skin Integrity
  5759. CLINICAL TIP
  5760. FIGURE 25.3 Stemmer sign: Objective test for lymphedema in the extremities.
  5761. Girth Measurements
  5762. Volumetric Measurements
  5763. Bioimpedance Measurements
  5764. Lymphedema Risk Reduction
  5765. Management of Lymphedema
  5766. Background and Rationale
  5767. BOX 25.3 Precautions, Risk Reduction, and Self-Management of Lymphedema
  5768. Comprehensive Regimens and Components
  5769. Manual lymphatic drainage.
  5770. BOX 25.4 Components of a Decongestive Lymphatic Therapy Program
  5771. Exercise.
  5772. Compression therapy.
  5773. FIGURE 25.4 Upper extremity multilayer bandaging with padding from the upper arm to the hand.
  5774. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5775. TABLE 25.1 Garment Compression Classification
  5776. Skin care and hygiene.
  5777. Use of Community Resources
  5778. Breast Cancer-Related Lymphatic Dysfunction
  5779. Background
  5780. Surgical Procedures
  5781. Mastectomy
  5782. Breast-Conserving Surgery
  5783. Evaluation of Lymph Node Involvement
  5784. Radiation Therapy
  5785. Impairments and Complications Related to Breast Cancer Treatment
  5786. Postoperative Pain
  5787. Incisional pain.
  5788. Posterior cervical and shoulder girdle pain.
  5789. Postoperative Vascular and Pulmonary Complications
  5790. Lymphedema
  5791. Chest Wall Adhesions
  5792. Decreased Shoulder Mobility
  5793. BOX 25.5 Factors Contributing to Impaired Shoulder Mobility After Breast Cancer Surgery
  5794. FIGURE 25.5 Axillary Web Syndrome.
  5795. Weakness of the Involved Upper Extremity
  5796. Shoulder weakness.
  5797. Decreased grip strength.
  5798. Postural Malalignment
  5799. Fatigue and Decreased Endurance
  5800. Psychological Considerations
  5801. Guidelines for Management Following Breast Cancer Surgery
  5802. BOX 25.6 MANAGEMENT GUIDELINES—After Surgery for Breast Cancer
  5803. Special Considerations
  5804. Patient education.
  5805. Exercise.
  5806. CLINICAL TIP
  5807. BOX 25.7 Exercise Precautions During Treatment of Breast Cancer
  5808. Community resources.
  5809. Exercises for the Management of Lymphedema
  5810. Background and Rationale
  5811. BOX 25.8 Exercises for Lymphatic Drainage: Principles and Rationale
  5812. Components of Exercise Regimens for Management of Lymphedema
  5813. Deep Breathing and Relaxation Exercises
  5814. Flexibility Exercises
  5815. Strengthening and Muscular Endurance Exercises
  5816. Cardiovascular Conditioning Exercises
  5817. FOCUS ON EVIDENCE
  5818. Lymphatic Drainage Exercises
  5819. Guidelines for Lymphatic Drainage Exercises
  5820. Preparation for Lymphatic Drainage Exercises
  5821. During Lymphatic Drainage Exercises
  5822. After Lymphatic Drainage Exercises
  5823. Selected Exercises for Lymphatic Drainage: Upper and Lower Extremity Sequences
  5824. BOX 25.9 Sequence of Selected Exercises for Management of Upper or Lower Extremity Lymphedema
  5825. Sequence of Exercises
  5826. Exercises Common to Upper and Lower Extremity Sequences
  5827. CLINICAL TIP
  5828. Exercises Specifically for Upper Extremity Lymphedema Clearance
  5829. CLINICAL TIP
  5830. FIGURE 25.6 Active circumduction of the edematous extremity.
  5831. FIGURE 25.7 Active shoulder exercises while lying on a firm, foam roll.
  5832. FIGURE 25.8 Overhead wall press.
  5833. Exercises Specifically for Lower Extremity Lymphedema Clearance
  5834. FIGURE 25.9 Repeated outward rotation of the hips with legs elevated and resting on a wall.
  5835. FIGURE 25.10 Sliding feet up and down a wall with hips externally rotated.
  5836. FIGURE 25.11 Repetitive walking movements.
  5837. FIGURE 25.12 Hip adduction across the midline to clear inguinal nodes.
  5838. Independent Learning Activities
  5839. Critical Thinking and Discussion
  5840. Laboratory Practice
  5841. Case Studies
  5842. Case 1
  5843. Case 2
  5844. REFERENCES
  5845. Back Matter
  5846. Glossary
  5847. A
  5848. B
  5849. C
  5850. D
  5851. E
  5852. F
  5853. G
  5854. H
  5855. I
  5856. J
  5857. K
  5858. L
  5859. M
  5860. N
  5861. O
  5862. P
  5863. Q
  5864. R
  5865. S
  5866. T
  5867. V
  5868. Index